2017 Civic

User Manual: 2017-civic

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 601

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits
chemicals known to the state of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that
have the special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Event Data Recorders

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by
anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the
vehicle owner.

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
00X31-TBA-6100

Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record
information about powertrain performance. The data can be used
to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians
diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with
data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains
confidential.

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this
vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded
by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid
damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

2017 Civic Sedan Owner's Manual

AOM-03553

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

1 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

A Few Words About Safety

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And
operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

● Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
● Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and other information on labels and
in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that
could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You
must use your own good judgment.

3DANGER

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.

3WARNING

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.

3CAUTION

You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.

● Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions.
● Safety Section - such as Safe Driving.
● Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information - please
read it carefully.

Contents

This owner’s manual should be considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find
descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
Images throughout this owner’s manual (including the front cover)
represent features and equipment that are available on some, but
not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these
features.
This owner’s manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and
Canada.

2 Safe Driving P. 33
For Safe Driving P. 34

Seat Belts P. 38

Airbags P. 46

2 Instrument Panel P. 75
Indicators P. 76

Gauges and Displays P. 108

2 Controls P. 127
Clock P. 128
Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 130
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * P. 156
Adjusting the Seats P. 173
Climate Control System * P. 196

2 Features P. 203
Audio System P. 204
Audio System Basic Operation P. 211, 229
Customized Features P. 308
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * P. 339, 362

2 Driving P. 395
Before Driving P. 396
Towing a Trailer P. 401
Multi-View Rear Camera P. 474
Refueling P. 476

The information and specifications included in this publication were
in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice and without incurring any
obligation.

2 Maintenance P. 481
Before Performing Maintenance P. 482
Maintenance MinderTM P. 485
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 519
Heating System */Climate Control System * Maintenance P. 535

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 543
Tools P. 544
If a Tire Goes Flat P. 545
Overheating P. 559
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 561
When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 573
Refueling P. 574

2 Information P. 575
Specifications P. 576
Emissions Testing P. 583

Identification Numbers P. 580
Warranty Coverages P. 585

Contents
Quick Reference Guide
Child Safety P. 60

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 72

Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 147
Security System P. 150
Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 157
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items P. 181

Opening and Closing the Windows P. 153
Adjusting the Mirrors P. 171
Heating System * P. 193

Audio Error Messages P. 299

General Information on the Audio System P. 302

When Driving P. 402
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 479

Braking P. 457
Turbo Engine Vehicle * P. 480

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 495
Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 522
Cleaning P. 536

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 510
Battery P. 531
Accessories and Modifications P. 541

Engine Does Not Start P. 552
Jump Starting P. 555
Fuses P. 567
Emergency Towing P. 571

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 581
Authorized Manuals P. 587

P. 4

Safety Labels P. 73

Parking Your Vehicle P. 473

P. 33

Instrument Panel

P. 75

Controls

P. 127

Features

P. 203

Driving

P. 395

Maintenance

P. 481

Handling the Unexpected

P. 543

Information

P. 575

Index

P. 589

Remote Transmitter Care P. 533

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 558
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 572

Reporting Safety Defects P. 582
Customer Service Information P. 588

Safe Driving

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ System Indicators (P76)
❙ Gauges (P108)
❙ Information Display * (P110)
❙ Driver Information Interface * (P113)

❙ Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Button * (P452)
❙ (Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System OFF) Button (P448)
❙ Road Departure Mitigation (RDM)
Button * (P436)
❙ Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) OFF Button * (P465)
❙ Hazard Warning Button
❙ Audio System (P211, 229)
❙ Navigation System *
() See Navigation System Manual

❙ Rear Window Defogger (P169)
❙ Heated Door Mirror Button * (P169)
❙ Heating System * (P193)
❙ Climate Control System * (P196)
❙ Front Seat Heater Buttons * (P191)
❙ ENGINE START/STOP Button*1 (P158)
❙ Ignition Switch * (P157)
❙ Steering Wheel Adjustments (P170)

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

❙ (TRIP) Knob (P110, 114)
❙ Brightness Control (P168)
❙ Wipers/Washers (P166)
❙ Cruise Control Buttons * (P417)
❙ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Headlights/Turn Signals (P162)
❙ Fog Lights * (P165)
❙ LaneWatchTM* (P450)
❙ Km/Mile Change Knob * (P108)

Speed Follow (LSF) Buttons * (P422)
❙ Interval Button * (P430)
❙ Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button *
(P440)

❙ Horn (Press an area around
.)
❙
(Display/Information) Button *
(P113)

❙ Navigation System Voice Control Buttons *
(P254) () See the Navigation System Manual

❙ Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System
Voice Control Buttons * (P339, 362)

❙ SOURCE Button * (P207)
❙ ENTER Button * (P208)
❙ (+ / (- / / Buttons * (P207)
❙ 3 / 4 / / Buttons * (P208)
* Not available on all models

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Power Window Switches (P153)
❙ Power Door Lock Master Switch (P142)
❙ Door Mirror Controls (P172)
❙ Rearview Mirror (P171)
❙ Interior Fuse Box (P568)
❙ Driver’s Front Airbag (P49)
❙ Passenger’s Front Airbag
(P49)

❙ USB Port (P205)
❙ Wireless Charger * (P188)
❙ Glove Box (P183)
❙ Shift Lever
Continuously Variable
Transmission (P411)
Manual Transmission (P413)

❙ Accessory Power Socket
(P187)

❙ ECON Button (P416)
❙ USB Port * (P205)

❙ Hood Release Handle (P497)
❙ Trunk Opener (P147)
6

❙ Electric Parking Brake Switch (P457)
❙ Automatic Brake Hold Button (P460)

❙ Coat Hook (P190)
❙ Seat Belts (P38)

Quick Reference Guide

❙ Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P67)
❙ Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P68)
❙ Side Curtain Airbags (P55)
❙ Coat Hook (P190)
❙ Grab Handle

❙ Map Lights (P182)
❙ Moonroof Switch * (P156)
❙ Sun Visors
❙ Vanity Mirrors

❙ Ceiling Light (P181)
❙ Rear Seat (P179)
❙ LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P65)

❙ Front Seat (P173)
❙ Side Airbags (P53)

* Not available on all models

Visual Index
Quick Reference Guide

❙ Maintenance Under the Hood (P495)
❙ Windshield Wipers (P166, 519)
❙ Power Door Mirrors (P172)
❙ Side Turn Signal Lights * (P162, 516)
❙ Door Lock/Unlock Control (P133)
❙ Headlights (P162, 510)
❙ Front Turn Signal Lights (P162, 514)
❙ Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P162, 516)
❙ Front Side Marker Lights (P515)
❙ Tires (P522, 545)
❙ Fog Lights * (P165, 512)
❙ How to Refuel (P477)
❙ High-Mount Brake Light (P518)
❙ Opening/Closing the Trunk (P147)
❙ Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P149)
❙ Multi-View Rear Camera (P474)
❙ Trunk Release Button * (P148)
❙ License Plate Light (P518)
❙ Taillights (P518)
❙ Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights (P517)
❙ Brake Lights (P517)
❙ Rear Turn Signal Lights (P517)
❙ Back-Up Lights (P517)

Eco Assist® System

(P 416)
Quick Reference Guide

Ambient Meter

● Changes color to reflect your driving
style.
Green: Fuel efficient driving
White green: Moderate acceleration/
deceleration
White: Aggressive acceleration/
deceleration
● The ambient meter color changes in
accordance with your brake or
accelerator pedal operation.

Models with driver information interface

ECON Button (P 416)
Helps maximize fuel economy.

The message is displayed for a few seconds when the
ECON button is pressed.

ECON Mode Indicator (P 86)
Comes on when the ECON button is pressed.
* Not available on all models

Safe Driving

(P 33)

Quick Reference Guide

Airbags (P 46)
● Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help to protect you and
your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.

Child Safety (P 60)
● All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat.
● Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat.
● Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.

Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 72)
● Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon
monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon
monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 38)
● Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well
back in the seat.
● Check that your passengers are wearing
their seat belts correctly.

Before Driving Checklist (P 37)
● Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints,
steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Fasten your lap belt as
low as possible.

Instrument Panel

(P 75)

Models with information display

System Indicators

System Indicators
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

Shift Lever Position Indicator *
Immobilizer System Indicator/
Security System Alarm Indicator

Tachometer

Low Fuel Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) System
Indicator

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

VSA® OFF Indicator

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *

Door and Trunk Open
Indicator
Automatic Brake Hold
System Indicator
U.S.

Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator

CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator *
Continuously variable
transmission models

Temperature Gauge

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Canada
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada

Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)

Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator

Quick Reference Guide

Gauges (P 108)/Information Display * (P 110)/
Driver Information Interface * (P 113)/System Indicators (P 76)

Brake Depressing
Indicator
Manual transmission
models

System Indicators

Lights Indicators

Brake Depressing
Indicator

ECON Mode Indicator

Lights On Indicator

Maintenance Minder
Indicator

Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator *

High Beam Indicator

Washer Level
Indicator *
* Not available on all models

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

12 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

System Indicators

Models with driver information interface

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators

System Indicators
Quick Reference Guide

Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

Electric Power
Steering (EPS) System
Indicator

Shift Lever Position Indicator *

Low Fuel Indicator

Charging System
Indicator

Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA®) System
Indicator

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

200

323.4

VSA® OFF Indicator

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *

12ᾉ34

CRUISE CONTROL
Indicator *

Automatic Brake Hold
System Indicator
U.S.

Automatic Brake Hold
Indicator

Canada

Immobilizer System
Indicator/Security System
Alarm Indicator
Temperature Gauge

Tachometer

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator *

ECON Mode Indicator
U.S.
Canada
U.S.
Canada

Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Red)
Parking Brake and
Brake System
Indicator (Amber)

Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow
(LSF) Indicator
(Amber/Green) *

System Indicators
System Message
Indicator
Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator *

Lights Indicators
Lights On Indicator
High Beam Indicator
Fog Light Indicator *

Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) Indicator *
Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS)
Indicator (Amber/
Green) *

Controls

(P 127)
Models with Display Audio

The audio system receives signals from GPS
satellites, updating the clock automatically.

Models with color audio system

ENGINE START/STOP
Button * (P 158)
● Press the button to change the vehicle’s
power mode.

Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK
button.

Rotate
.

to change hour, then press

Rotate
press
.

to change minute, then

Select SET, then press

Select the
Settings.

Select Clock, then Clock Adjustment.

Touch the respective 3 / 4 icon to
adjust the hours or minutes up or
down.

Select OK.

Quick Reference Guide

Clock (P 128)

(HOME) icon, then select

These indications are used to show how to
operate the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob.
• Rotate
to select.
• Press
to enter.

* Not available on all models

Turn Signals (P 162)
Turn Signal Control Lever

Lights (P 162)
Light Control Switches

Wipers and Washers
(P 166)

Quick Reference Guide

Wiper/Washer Control Lever

Right
High Beam
Low Beam

Adjustment Ring *
(- : Low sensitivity*1
(- : Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2
(+ : High sensitivity*1
(+
: Higher speed, more sweeps*2

Flashing
Left

Pull toward
you to spray
washer fluid.
MIST
OFF
AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically
INT*2: Low speed with intermittent
LO: Low speed wipe
HI: High speed wipe

*1:Models with automatic intermittent
wipers
*2:Models without automatic intermittent
wipers
Models with automatic intermittent wipers

AUTO should always be turned OFF before
the following situation in order to prevent
severe damage to the wiper system:
● Cleaning the windshield
● Driving through a car wash
● No rain present

Steering Wheel (P 170)

Trunk (P 147)

Power Windows (P 153)

Trunk Opener
● To unlock and open the trunk:

Unlocking the Front
Doors from the Inside

Indicator

• Press the trunk opener on the driver’s
door.
• Press the trunk release button on the
remote transmitter or the smart entry
remote.
• Press the trunk release button * on the
trunk lid.

(P 141)

Power Door Mirrors

● Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.

(P 172)

Quick Reference Guide

● With the ignition switch in ON (w *1, open
and close the power windows.
● If the power window lock button is in the
off position, each passenger’s window
can be opened and closed with its own
switch.
● If the power window lock button is in the
on position (indicator is on), each
passenger’s window switch is disabled.

● To adjust, pull the adjustment lever
towards you, adjust to the desired
position, then lock the lever back in place.

Window
Switch
Power Window Lock Button

, move
● With the ignition switch in ON
the selector switch to L or R.
● Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror.
(w *1

Selector Switch

Adjustment Switch

*1:Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Heating System * (P 193)
Quick Reference Guide

● Press the AUTO button to activate the heating system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
Canadian models with color audio system

Temperature Control Dial
AUTO Button
(Recirculation) Button
(Fresh Air) Button

Fan Control Dial
(ON/OFF) Button
(MODE Control) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.

Climate Control System * (P196)
Quick Reference Guide

● Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.
● Press the
button to turn the system on or off.
● Press the
button to defrost the windshield.
U.S. models with color audio system

Temperature Control Dial
AUTO Button
(Recirculation) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button

Fan Control Dial
(ON/OFF) Button
A/C (Air Conditioning) Button
(MODE Control) Button
Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.

* Not available on all models

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

18 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Models with Display Audio
Models without SYNC button

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Touch Screen

(CLIMATE) Button
(ON/OFF) Button

Temperature Control Dial

Fan Control Dial

AUTO Button
(Recirculation) Button
(Fresh Air) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button

Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

19 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Models with Display Audio
Models with SYNC button

Quick Reference Guide

Audio/Information Touch Screen

(CLIMATE) Button
SYNC (Synchronized) Button

Driver side Temperature
Control Dial

Passenger side Temperature
Control Dial

AUTO Button
(ON/OFF) Button
(Recirculation) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button

Air flows from floor and
windshield defroster vents.
Air flows from floor vents.
Air flows from floor and
dashboard vents.
Air flows from dashboard
vents.

Features

(P 203)

Quick Reference Guide

Audio Remote Controls

Models with driver information interface

/
Button
3 / 4 /
(+ / (- Bar

(P 207)
Models with information display

(+ / (- /

Button

a
b

Press ENTER to switch the display to a
preset list you stored in the preset
buttons.
Press 3 or 4 to select a preset, then
press ENTER.

• When listening to a USB flash drive
ENTER Button

SOURCE Button
● (+ / (- Button
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
● SOURCE Button
Press to change the audio mode: FM/AM/
USB/iPod/Bluetooth® Audio.
●
/
Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.

• When listening to the radio and
SiriusXM® *

● (+ / (- Bar
Press to adjust the volume up/down.
Sliding up or down also increases or
decreases the volume.
Swipe down quickly to mute the volume
and swipe up to cancel the mute.
● 3 / 4 Button
Press 3 or 4 to cycle through the audio
mode as follows:
FM AM SiriusXM® * USB iPod
Bluetooth® Audio Pandora® * Apps *
Audio Apps *

Press ENTER to display the folder list.

Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.

Press ENTER to display a list of tracks in
that folder.
d Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then
press ENTER.
You can also swipe up or down to scroll
through the list of tracks alphabetically.

• When listening to an iPod

a
c
d

Press ENTER to display a list of items in
the category.
Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then
press ENTER.

u Press ENTER and press 3 or 4
repeatedly until a desired item you
want to listen is displayed.

/
Button
Radio:Press to change the preset station.
Press and hold to select the next or
previous strong station.
USB device:
Press to skip to the beginning of
the next song or return to the
beginning of the current song.
Press and hold to change a folder.
●
Button:
Press to change contents.
2 Driver Information Interface *
(P113)

Quick Reference Guide

Press ENTER to display the iPod music
list.
Press 3 or 4 to select a category.

●

You can also swipe up or down to scroll
through the list of tracks alphabetically.

• When listening to Internet Radio *

Press ENTER to display the station list.

Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then
press ENTER.

• When listening to Bluetooth® Audio

Press ENTER to display the track list.

Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then
press ENTER.

* Not available on all models

Audio system (P 204)
Models with color audio system (P 211)

Quick Reference Guide

Driver Information Interface *

(Day/Night) Button

Audio/Information Screen

RADIO Button

(Phone) Button

MEDIA Button

(Sound) Button

VOL/

(Volume/Power) Knob
(Seek/Skip) Button

LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) Knob
MENU/CLOCK Button
(Back) Button

(Seek/Skip) Button
Preset Buttons (1-6)

Models with Display Audio (P 229)

For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

Driver Information Interface

Quick Reference Guide

(Day/Night) Button
(Audio) Icon
(Home) Icon
VOL (Volume) Icons
(Menu) Icon
(Back) Icon

Audio/Information Screen

(Instrument Panel) Icon

* Not available on all models

Driving

(P 395)

Quick Reference Guide

Manual Transmission * (P 413)
Continuously Variable Transmission * (P 411)
● Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine.
● Shifting
Park
Turn off or start the engine.
Transmission is locked.

Release Button
Shift Lever

Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Normal driving.
Drive (S)
● Better acceleration.
● Increased engine braking.
● Going up or down hills.
Low
Further increased engine braking.
● Going up or down hills.
●

Depress the brake pedal and press the
release button to move out of (P .
Press the release button to
move the shift lever.
Move the shift lever without
pressing the release button.

VSA® On and Off (P 448)

Refueling (P 476)
Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Fuel tank capacity: 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

Cruise Control * (P 417)
● Cruise control allows you to maintain a
set speed without keeping your foot on
the accelerator pedal.
● To use cruise control, press the CRUISE
button, then press the –/SET button once
you have achieved the desired speed
(above 25 mph or 40 km/h).

Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
OFF Button* (P 465)

Unlock the driver’s
door.
2 Locking/Unlocking
the Doors from
the Inside
(P140)
Wait for five seconds
Press on the edge of
the fuel fill door to
make it pop up
slightly.

Quick Reference Guide

● The vehicle stability assist (VSA®) system helps
stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and
helps maintain traction while accelerating on
loose or slippery road surfaces.
● VSA® comes on automatically every time
you start the engine.
● To partially disable or fully restore VSA®
function, press and hold the button until
you hear a beep.

After refueling, wait
for about five
seconds before
removing the filler
nozzle.

● When a possible collision is likely unavoidable,
the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle
speed and the severity of the collision.
● To turn the CMBSTM on or off, press and
hold the button until you hear a beep.
U.S. models

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) (P 452)
● Detects a change in tire conditions and overall
dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
● The TPMS is turned on automatically
every time you start the engine.
● A calibration procedure must be
performed when certain conditions arise.
* Not available on all models

Honda SensingTM*
Quick Reference Guide

Honda SensingTM is a driver support system
which employs the use of two distinctly
different kinds of sensors, a radar sensor
located in the lower bumper and a front
sensor camera mounted to the interior side
of the windshield, behind the rear view
mirror.
The camera is located
behind the rearview
mirror.
Front Sensor Camera

Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * (P422)

Collision Mitigation
Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) * (P 465)

Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and
a set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected
vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and
stop your vehicle, without you having to
keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.

Can assist you when there is a possibility of
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The
CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as
to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is
deemed unavoidable.

Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
System * (P 436)
Alerts and helps to assist you when the
system detects a possibility of your vehicle
unintentionally crossing over detected lane
markings.

Radar Sensor

The radar sensor is in
the lower bumper
next to the fog light.

Lane Keeping Assist
System (LKAS) * (P 440)
Provides steering input to help keep the
vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the
vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Maintenance

(P 481)

Pull the hood release handle under the corner of the dashboard.

Locate the hood latch lever, pull it up, and then raise the hood.
Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

Quick Reference Guide

Under the Hood (P 495)
● Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add
when necessary.
● Check brake fluid.
● Check the battery condition monthly.

Wiper Blades (P 519)
● Replace blades if they leave streaks
across the windshield.

Tires (P 522)

Lights (P 510)

● Inspect tires and wheels
regularly.
● Check tire pressures regularly.
● Install snow tires for winter
driving.

● Inspect all lights regularly.

When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in
place.
* Not available on all models

Handling the Unexpected
Quick Reference Guide

Flat Tire (P 545)
● Park in a safe location and replace the
flat tire with the compact spare tire in the
trunk.

Engine Won’t Start
(P 552)
● If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.

Overheating (P 559)
● Park in a safe location. If you do not see
steam under the hood, open the hood,
and let the engine cool down.

Indicators Come On

Blown Fuse (P 567)

Emergency Towing

(P 561)

● Check for a blown fuse if an electrical
device does not operate.

(P 571)

● Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.

(P 543)

● Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

29 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

What to Do If

Models with smart entry system

The power mode does not
change from VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) to ACCESSORY.
Why?
Models without smart entry system

The ignition switch does
not turn from (q to (0 and
I cannot remove the key.
Why?

The steering wheel may be locked.
Models without smart entry system
●

Try to turn the steering wheel left and right
while turning the ignition key.

Models with smart entry system*1
●

Move the steering wheel left and right after pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button.

Quick Reference Guide

Models without smart entry system

The ignition switch does
not turn from (0 to (q .
Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P .

Models with smart entry system

The power mode does not
change from ACCESSORY
to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
Why?
Why does the brake pedal
pulsate slightly when
applying the brakes?

This can occur when the ABS activates, and does not indicate a
problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never
pump the brake pedal.

*1:Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

Quick Reference Guide

30 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

The rear door cannot be
opened from inside the
vehicle. Why?

Check if the childproof lock is in the
lock position. If so, open the rear
door with the outside door handle.
To cancel this function, slide the lever
to the unlock position.

Why do the doors lock
after I unlocked the doors
using a remote
transmitter?

If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are
relocked automatically for security.

Why does the beeper
sound when I open the
driver's door?

The beeper sounds when:
● The key is left in the ignition switch *.
● The power mode * is in ACCESSORY.
● The exterior lights are left on.

Why does the beeper
sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are
not wearing their seat belts.

Why do I hear a screeching
sound when I apply the
brake pedal?

The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

31 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.

Depressing the accelerator
pedal does not release the
parking brake
automatically. Why?

●
●

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
Check if the transmission is in (P or (N . If so, select any other
position.

* Not available on all models

Quick Reference Guide

Pressing the electric
parking brake switch does
not release the parking
brake. Why?

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

32 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving
Important Safety Precautions ............. 34
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features............ 36
Safety Checklist ................................. 37
Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts........................ 38
Fastening a Seat Belt.......................... 42
Seat Belt Inspection............................ 45
Airbags
Airbag System Components............... 46
Types of Airbags ................................ 49
Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 49

Side Airbags ...................................... 53
Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 55
Airbag System Indicators.................... 57
Airbag Care ....................................... 59
Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers ............... 60
Safety of Infants and Small Children.......62
Safety of Larger Children ................... 70
Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 72
Safety Labels
Label Locations .................................. 73

For Safe Driving
The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them
properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the
most important.
Safe Driving

Important Safety Precautions
■ Always wear your seat belt
A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

■ Restrain all children
Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the
front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger
children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat.

■ Be aware of airbag hazards
While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants
who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children,
and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.

■ Don't drink and drive
Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to
changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink.
So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use
of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the
driver while driving.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

35 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions

■ Control your speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher
the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds.
Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

Safe Driving

■ Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely
Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying
close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash.
Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to
divert some attention away from driving.

■ Keep your vehicle in safe condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous.
To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition
frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
1Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
9

Safe Driving

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that
work together to help protect you and your
passengers during a crash.

6
10
7
8
10

6
7
8
9
10
11

Safety Cage
Crush Zones
Seats and Seat-Backs
Head Restraints
Collapsible Steering Column
Seat Belts
Front Airbags
Side Airbags
Side Curtain Airbags
Door Locks
Seat Belt Tensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and
your passengers.

Some features do not require any action on your part.
These include a strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger compartment,
front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering
column, and tensioners that tighten the front seat
belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full
advantage of these features unless you remain seated
in the correct position and always wear your seat
belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to
injuries if they are not used properly.

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safety Checklist
1Safety Checklist
Models with information display

If the door and trunk open indicator is on, a door or
the trunk is not completely closed. Close all doors
tightly until the indicator goes off.
2 Door and Trunk Open Indicator * P. 82

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 140

• Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are
adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the
vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a
crash.

Safe Driving

For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items
each time before you drive.
• After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked.
Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider
from unexpectedly opening a door.

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 173

• Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective
when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller
persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 176

• Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any
passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42

• Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child’s age, height
and weight.

Models with driver information interface

If the door and trunk open message appears on the
driver information interface, a door and/or the trunk
is not completely closed. Close all doors and the
trunk tightly until the message disappears.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages * P. 94

2 Child Safety P. 60

* Not available on all models

Seat Belts
About Your Seat Belts

Safe Driving

Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you
connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety
features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the
vehicle, against other passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat
belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full
advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including:
- frontal impacts
- side impacts
- rear impacts
- rollovers

■ Lap/shoulder seat belts
All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency
locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping
some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to
restrain your body. The front passenger’s and rear seat belts also have a lockable
retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 67

1About Your Seat Belts

3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases
the chance of serious injury or death in a
crash, even though your vehicle has
airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always
wear seat belts and wear them properly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your
risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories
require you to wear seat belts.
The emergency locking retractor may lock if you lean
forward too quickly. Slower movements will allow
the belt to extend fully without locking.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Continued

1About Your Seat Belts
If a rear seat passenger moves around and extends
the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If
this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the
seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely.
Then refasten the belt.

Safe Driving

■ Proper use of seat belts
Follow these guidelines for proper use:
• All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the
belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.
• Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.
• Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort
or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability
and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Seat Belt Reminder
Models with information display

Safe Driving
Models with driver information
interface

1Seat Belt Reminder

The seat belt system includes an indicator on
the instrument panel to remind the driver or a
front passenger or both to fasten their seat
belts.
If the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1 and
a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound
and the indicator will blink. After a few
seconds, the beeper will stop and the
indicator will come on and remain illuminated
until the seat belt is fastened.
The beeper will periodically sound and the
indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving
until the seat belt is fastened.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

The indicator will also come on if a front passenger
does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.
When no one is sitting in the front passenger’s seat,
the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not
sound. The indicator also may not come on and the
beeper may not sound when the occupant is not
heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such
occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should
be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag
likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 60

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

■ Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.

The seat belt tensioners can only operate once.
If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come
on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and
thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not
offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle also activates.

Safe Driving

The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts during a moderate-tosevere frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to
inflate the front airbags.

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt
After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well
back in the seat:
2 Adjusting the Seats P. 173
Safe Driving

Pull out slowly.
Correct
Seated
Posture.

Buckle

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt or one that does not appear to be working
correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working
properly may not protect the occupant in a crash.
Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or
retractor mechanism.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then
tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is
secure.
u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or
caught on anything.

Latch
Plate

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

1Fastening a Seat Belt

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

1Fastening a Seat Belt

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can
cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly
positioned before driving.

Safe Driving

Lap belt
as low as
possible

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as
possible across your hips, then pull up on
the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part
fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic
bones take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to
remove any slack, then check that the belt
rests across the center of your chest and
over your shoulder. This spreads the forces
of a crash over the strongest bones in your
upper body.

To release the belt, push the red PRESS button then
guide the belt by hand until it has retracted
completely.
When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of
the way and will not get caught by closing the door.
1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor

The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter
occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while
pulling the release outward.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests
across the center of your chest and over
your shoulder.

The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four
levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height
one level at a time.
After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder
anchor position is secure.

Pull
outward

Continued

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

■ Advice for Pregnant Women
Safe Driving

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when
driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the
belt as low as possible across the hips.
Wear the shoulder belt
across the chest avoiding
the abdomen.

Wear the lap part of the
belt as low as possible
across the hips.

1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is
okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your
unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front
airbag:
• When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle.
• When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:

3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can
result in serious injury or death if the seat
belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have
any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Safe Driving

• Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear.
• Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily.
u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make
sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.

1Seat Belt Inspection

Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper
protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.
A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of
protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after
any collision.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

46 ページ

Airbags
Airbag System Components

Safe Driving

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

47 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored
in the center of the steering wheel; the
front passenger's airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked SRS
AIRBAG.
b Two

side airbags, one for the driver and
one for a front passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the seatbacks. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.
side curtain airbags, one for each
side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored
in the ceiling, above the side windows.
The front and rear pillars are marked
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.

d An

electronic control unit that, when the
vehicle is on, continually monitors
information about the various impact
sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover
sensor, airbag activators, seat belt
tensioners, and other vehicle
information. During a crash event the
unit can record such information.

h Impact

sensors that can detect a
moderate-to-severe front impact or side
impact.

i An indicator on the dashboard that alerts

you that the front passenger’s front
airbag has been turned off.

Safe Driving

The front, front side, and side curtain
airbags are deployed according to the
direction and severity of impact. Both side
curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover.
The airbag system includes:

j An indicator on the instrument panel that
e Automatic

front seat belt tensioners. In
addition, the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat belt buckles incorporate
sensors that detect whether or not the
belts are fastened.

driver’s seat position sensor. If the seat
is too far forward, the airbag will inflate
with less force.

alerts you to a possible problem with your
airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
kA

rollover sensor that detects if your
vehicle is about to roll over and signal the
control unit to deploy both side curtain
airbags.

c Two

g Weight

sensors in the front passenger’s
seat. The front passenger’s airbag will be
turned off if the weight on the seat is
approximately 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the
weight of an infant or small child).

Continued

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

■ Important Facts About Your Airbags
Safe Driving

Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises,
and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing
their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as
far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the
vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as
possible.
Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that
can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags
deploy.
Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.
Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp
object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers. Objects on the
covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags
or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags
Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together,
airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the
deployment path of the front airbag by holding each
side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over
the airbag cover.

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with three types of airbags:
• Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
• Side airbags: Airbags in the driver’s and front passenger’s seat-backs.
• Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows.
Each is discussed in the following pages.

1Types of Airbags

Front Airbags (SRS)

1Front Airbags (SRS)

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to
supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary
restraint system.

■ Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and
in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a
small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion
process of the inflator material and is not harmful.
People with respiratory problems may experience
some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Safe Driving

The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect
the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.

The airbags can inflate whenever the ignition switch
is in ON (w *1.

Dual-Stage, Multiple-Threshold Front Airbags
(SRS)
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, multiplethreshold front airbags (SRS).
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or
both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate
at different rates, depending on the severity of the
crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/
or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to
supplement the seat belts to help to reduce the
likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal
crashes.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Operation
Safe Driving

Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions.
When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control
unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.
A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a
vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

■ How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the
front airbag provides supplemental protection
for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that
they won't interfere with the driver's visibility
or the ability to steer or operate other
controls.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags
normally inflate within a split second of each other, it
is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can
happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin,
or threshold, that determines whether or not the
airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will
provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental
protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

51 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Continued

Safe Driving

■ When front airbags should not deploy
Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and
help to save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might
occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash.
Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration
causes a driver or front passenger to move towards the front of the vehicle. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help to reduce
the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which
can cause the driver or passenger to move towards the side of the vehicle.
Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear
impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed
to deploy in such collisions.
Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle
is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front
airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide
little if any protection.
■ When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage
Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the
vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy.
Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object
that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is
underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
■ When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of
visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some
collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags
would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they
had deployed.

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

■ Advanced Airbags

1Advanced Airbags

Safe Driving

The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related
injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver’s advanced airbag system includes a
seat position sensor.

Driver’s
Seat
Position
Sensor

Based on information from this sensor and the
severity of the impact, the advanced airbag
system determines the optimal deployment of
the driver’s airbag.

The front passenger’s advanced airbag system
has weight sensors.

Passenger’s
Seat
Weight
Sensors

We advise against allowing a child under the
age of 12 to ride in the front passenger’s seat.
However, if you do allow a child under 12
to ride in the front passenger’s seat, note
that the system will automatically turn off the
front passenger’s airbag if the sensors detect
that the child is approximately 65 lbs (29 kg)
or less.

If there is a problem with the driver’s seat position
sensor, the SRS indicator will come on and the airbag
will inflate with full (normal) force, regardless of the
driver’s seating position.
For the advanced airbags to work properly:
• Do not spill any liquid on or under the seats.
• Do not put any object under the passenger’s seat.
• Make sure any objects are positioned properly on
the floor. Improperly positioned objects can
interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
• All occupants should sit upright and wear their seat
belts properly.
• Do not cover the passenger’s side dashboard with
a cloth, towel, cover, etc.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
P. 58

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver or a front passenger
during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

The side airbags are housed in the outside
edge of the driver’s and passenger’s seatbacks.
Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

Make sure you and your front seat passenger always
sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can
prevent the airbag from deploying properly and
increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags.
They can interfere with the proper operation of the
airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.

Safe Driving

■ Housing Locations

1Side Airbags

Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers
without consulting a dealer.
Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back
covers can prevent your side airbags from properly
deploying during a side impact.

Housing
Location

■ Operation
When
inflated

When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the
side airbag on the impact side to immediately
inflate.

Side
Airbag

Continued

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

54 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

■ When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage

Safe Driving

Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side
of the vehicle’s framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there
may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough
impact to deploy the airbag.

■ When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe
It is possible for a side airbag to not deploy during an impact that results in
apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the
far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle’s crushable body parts absorbed
most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been
needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags

■ Housing Locations
The side curtain airbags are located in the
ceiling above the side windows on both sides
of the vehicle.

1Side Curtain Airbags
If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is
about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side
curtain airbags and activates both front seat belt
tensioners.
If the impact is on the passenger’s side, the
passenger’s side curtain airbag deploys even if there
is no passenger in the passenger seat.

Safe Driving

The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the
outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain
airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of
partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes,
particularly rollover crashes.

To get the best protection from the side curtain
airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts
properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof
pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation
of the side curtain airbags.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

■ Operation
The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy
in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side
impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

Continued

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

56 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

■ When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision
One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled
frontal collision.
Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a
message appears on the driver information interface *.

Models with information display

■ When the ignition switch is turned to
ON (w *1
The indicator comes on for a few seconds,
then goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.

3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in
serious injury or death if the airbag systems
or tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts
you to a possible problem.

Safe Driving

■ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

Models with driver information interface

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the
system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don’t, your airbags and seat
belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

■ Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
U.S.
Safe Driving

Canada

■ When the passenger airbag off
indicator comes on
The indicator comes on to alert you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been turned off.
This occurs when the weight sensors detect
about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less, the weight of an
infant or small child, on the seat.

Infants and small children should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 60

If the front passenger seat is empty, the passenger’s front airbag will not deploy and
the indicator will come on.

1Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator
To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm
that:
• There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat-back.
• There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger’s seat.
• The front seat or seat-back is not forced back
against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• There is no object placed under or beside the front
passenger’s seat.
• The occupant is sitting in an upright position and
the seat back is not excessively reclined.
• The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
• The occupant’s feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
• There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger’s seat.
• Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat-back
pocket.
The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and
go off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is
near the airbag cutoff threshold.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as
possible if:
• All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the
front passenger seat.
• The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front
seat when the indicator is on.

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any
airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer in the following situations:

We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag
system components, including the airbag, tensioners,
sensors, and control unit.

Safe Driving

■ When the airbags have deployed
If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced.
Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be
replaced.

1Airbag Care

■ When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision
Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver’s
seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger’s seat, front seat belt
tensioners, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.
■ Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer
This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver’s seat position
sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger’s seat. If it is necessary to remove or
modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda
dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-8889-HONDA-9.

Child Safety
Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are
either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the
number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
Safe Driving

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province
and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride
in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because:
• An inflating front or side airbag can injure
or kill a child sitting in the front seat.
• A child in the front seat is more likely to
interfere with the driver’s ability to safely
control the vehicle.
• Statistics show that children of all sizes and
ages are safer when they are properly
restrained in a rear seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers

3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or
improperly restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be
properly restrained in a child seat. A larger
child should be properly restrained with a
seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear
seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws
restricting where children may ride.

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

• Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an
approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.

• Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would
likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
• Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very
seriously injured in a crash.
• Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.
• Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when
the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate
vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or
wrap one around their neck can result in
serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat
belt and make sure any unused seat belt a
child can reach is buckled, fully retracted,
and locked.

Safe Driving

• Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the
event of a collision.

1Protecting Child Passengers

To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.
To remind you of the passenger's front airbag
hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning
labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the
front visors. Please read and follow the instructions
on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 73

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children
■ Protecting Infants
Safe Driving

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the
infant reaches the seat manufacturer’s weight or height limit for the seat, and the
infant is at least one year old. Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for
a child up to two years old if the child’s height and weight are appropriate for a rearfacing seat.
■ Positioning a rear-facing child seat
Child seats must be placed and secured in a
rear seating position.

1Protecting Infants

3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury or death
during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the
rear seat, not the front.
Rear-facing child seats should never be installed in a
forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions before installation.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front
passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back
in the desired position.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger’s advanced front airbag
system.
2 Airbags P. 46

If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied.
Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Protecting Smaller Children

1Protecting Smaller Children

3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat can result in serious injury or
death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child
seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, and properly restrain the
child.

Safe Driving

If a child is at least one year old and within the weight range indicated by the child
seat manufacturer, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured
forward-facing child seat.
■ Forward-facing child seat placement
We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations
regarding child seat use where you are driving, and
follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with
advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A
rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Continued

Many experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat
for a child up to two years old if the child’s height and
weight are appropriate for a rear-facing seat.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Selecting a Child Seat
Safe Driving

Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren).
Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both
are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be
installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat
manufacturer’s use and care instructions as well as the instructions in this manual.
Proper installation is key to maximizing your child’s safety.
In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible
child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security.
This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured
with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat
manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat
once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner’s manual
for proper installation instructions.

■ Important consideration when selecting a child seat
Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements:
• The child seat is the correct type and size for the child.
• The child seat is the correct type for the seating position.
• The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

1Selecting a Child Seat
Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is
simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed
to simplify the installation process and reduce the
likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

65 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
Safe Driving

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats.
A child seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of
connectors.
1. Locate the lower anchors under the marks.

Marks

Lower Anchors

Rigid Type

2. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat then
attach the child seat to the lower anchors
according to the instructions that came
with the child seat.
u When installing the child seat, make sure
that the lower anchors are not
obstructed by the seat belt or any other
object.

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

Safe Driving

For your child’s safety, when using a child seat
installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the
child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child
seat that is not properly secured will not adequately
protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
Flexible Type
Straight Top Tether Type
Tether Strap
Hook

Anchor
Other Top Tether Type
Tether Strap
Hook

Anchor

3. Open the tether anchor cover behind the
head restraint.
4. Route the tether strap over the top of the
head restraint and secure the tether strap
hook to the anchor.
5. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.
6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

■ Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not
adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause
injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Safe Driving

1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat.
2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer’s
instructions, and insert the latch plate into
the buckle.
u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all
the way out until it stops. This activates the
lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt completely wind up into
the retractor, then try to pull it out to make
sure the retractor is locked.
u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt
out, the lockable retractor is not
activated. Pull the seat belt all the way
out, and repeat steps 3 – 4.
5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near
the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt.
u When doing this, place your weight on
the child seat and push it into the vehicle
seat.

Continued

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by
rocking it forward and back and side to
side; little movement should be felt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child
can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor
is activated, and the belt is fully retracted
and locked.

■ Adding Security with a Tether
A tether anchorage point is provided behind
each rear seating position. If you have a child
restraint system that comes with a tether but
can be installed with a seat belt, the tether
may be used for additional security.

Tether Anchorage Points

1. Locate the appropriate tether anchorage
point and lift the cover.
Anchor

Cover

Straight Top Tether Type in Outer
Position
Tether Strap
Hook

Anchor

2. Route the tether strap over the head
restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle
and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

1Adding Security with a Tether
Since a tether can provide additional security to the
lap/shoulder seat belt installation, we recommend
using a tether whenever one is available.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

69 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Other Top Tether Type in Outer
Position
Tether Strap
Hook

Anchor
Straight Top Tether Type in Center
Position
Tether Strap
Hook

3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor.
4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

Anchor
Other Top Tether Type in Center
Position
Tether Strap
Hook

Anchor

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children
■ Protecting Larger Children
Safe Driving

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind
of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who
must sit in front.

■ Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/
shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the
following questions.
■ Checklist
• Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat?
• Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child’s neck and arm?
• Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs?
• Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder
seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a
booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children

3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in
front can result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the
vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible,
have the child sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly, using a booster seat if
needed.

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

■ Booster Seats

1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the
instructions that came with it, and install the seat
accordingly.
There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a
booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat
belt correctly.

Safe Driving

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used
properly, position the child in a booster seat in
a rear seating position. For the child’s safety,
check that the child meets the booster seat
manufacturer’s recommendations.

Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and
territories require children to use a booster seat until
they reach a given age or weight (e.g. six years or 60
lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or
province, or territory where you intend to drive.

■ Protecting Larger Children-Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever
have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:
• Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual.
• Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
• Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat.
• Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

■ Monitoring child passengers
We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more
mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up
properly.

Exhaust Gas Hazard
Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless,
odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon
monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Safe Driving

■ Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever
• The exhaust system is making an unusual noise.
• The exhaust system may have been damaged.
• The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into
the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open,
open all the windows and set the heating system */climate control system * as shown
below.
1. Select the fresh air mode.
2. Select the
mode.
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.
Adjust the heating system */climate control system * in the same manner if you sit in
your parked vehicle with the engine running.

* Not available on all models

1Carbon Monoxide Gas

3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and
even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that
expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up
with carbon monoxide gas.
Do not run the engine with the garage door closed.
Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the
garage immediately after starting the engine.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

73 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.

Sun Visor

Safe Driving

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer
for a replacement.

Canadian models
U.S. models

Dashboard
U.S. models only

Air Conditioner System *
U.S. models
Canadian models

Reserve Tank Cap

* Not available on all models

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

74 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.

Indicators ............................................ 76
Information Display Warning and
Information Messages * .................... 93
Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages * .................... 94
Gauges and Displays
Gauges............................................ 108
Information Display * ........................ 110
Driver Information Interface * ........... 113

* Not available on all models

Indicators

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

●

U.S.

Canada

Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Red)

(Red)

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off if the parking
brake has been released.
Comes on when the parking brake
is applied, and goes off when it is
released.
Comes on when the brake fluid
level is low.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the brake system.
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if you drive
with the parking brake not fully
released.
Comes on for about 15 seconds
when you pull the electric parking
brake switch while the ignition
switch is in LOCK (0 *1.
Stays on for about 15 seconds
when you turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0 *1 while the electric
parking brake is set.

Explanation
●

Comes on while driving - Make sure
the parking brake is released. Check the
brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator
comes on P. 563

●

Comes on along with the ABS
indicator - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On or Blinks P. 563

●

Blinks and the brake system indicator
(amber) comes on at the same time There is a problem with the electric
parking brake system. The parking brake
may not be set.
Avoid using the parking brake and have
your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red)
Comes On or Blinks at the Same
Time When the Brake System
Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 564

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

77 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Canada

Parking Brake
and Brake
System Indicator
(Amber)

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Comes on while driving - Avoid using
the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.

Message *
U.S.

Instrument Panel

U.S.

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with a system related to braking
other than the conventional brake
system.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the electric parking brake
system or the automatic brake
hold system.

Explanation

Canada

(Amber)

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Automatic Brake
Hold System
Indicator
Instrument Panel

U.S.

Canada

●

Automatic Brake
Hold Indicator

●

Low Oil Pressure
Indicator

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the automatic
brake hold system is on.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 460

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the automatic
brake hold is activated.

Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the engine oil
pressure is low.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 460

●

Comes on while driving - Immediately
stop in a safe place.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Comes On P. 561

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

—

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Readiness codes are part of the on board
diagnostics for the emissions control
systems.

●

Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.
Blinks while driving - Stop in a safe
place where there are no flammable
objects. Stop the engine for 10 minutes
or more, and wait for it to cool down.
Then, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Message *

2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 583

●

Instrument Panel

Malfunction
Indicator Lamp

Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts, or
after several seconds if the engine
did not start. If “readiness codes”
have not been set, it blinks five
times before it goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the emissions control system.
Blinks when a misfire in the
engine’s cylinders is detected.

Explanation

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Comes On or Blinks P. 562
●

Charging System
Indicator

●

Shift Lever
Position
Indicator *

Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on when the battery is not
charging.

●

Comes on while driving - Turn off the
heating system */climate control system *
and rear defogger in order to reduce
electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator
Comes On P. 561

Indicates the current shift lever
position.
2 Shifting P. 411

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Transmission
Indicator *

●

Instrument Panel

●

Seat Belt
Reminder
Indicator

●

Low Fuel
Indicator

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Blinks if the transmission system
has a problem.

●

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden
starts and acceleration and have your
vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Comes on and the beeper sounds
if you are not wearing a seat belt
when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1.
If the front passenger is not
wearing a seat belt, the indicator
comes on a few seconds later.
Blinks while driving if either you or
the front passenger has not
fastened a seat belt. The beeper
sounds and the indicator blinks at
regular intervals.

●

The beeper stops and the indicator goes
off when you and the front passenger
fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you or the front
passenger has fastened the seat belt
- A detection error may have occurred in
the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.

Comes on when the fuel reserve is
running low (approximately 1.8
U.S. gal/7.0 Liter left).
Blinks if there is a problem with
the fuel gauge.

●

2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 40

●

Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon
as possible.
Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS)
Indicator

●

Supplemental
Restraint System
Indicator

●

Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
System Indicator

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
If it comes on at any other time,
there is a problem with the ABS.

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if a problem with any of
the following is detected:
- Supplemental restraint system
- Side airbag system
- Side curtain airbag system
- Seat belt tensioner

●

Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Blinks when VSA® is active.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the VSA® system or hill start
assist system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Comes on if the VSA® system is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected,
then re-connected.

●

Message *

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. With this indicator
on, your vehicle still has normal braking
ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 463

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka
Electronic Stability Control (ESC),
System P. 447

Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Instrument Panel

Vehicle Stability
Assist (VSA®)
OFF Indicator

Door and Trunk
Open Indicator *

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you partially
disable VSA®.
Comes on if the VSA® system is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected,
then re-connected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

●

Comes on for a few seconds if you
turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if any door or the trunk
is not completely closed.
The beeper sounds and the
indicator comes on if any door or
the trunk is opened while driving.

●

Goes off when all doors and the trunk are
closed.

Comes on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (w *1, and
goes off when the engine starts.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the EPS system.

●

—

Stays on constantly or does not come
on at all - Have your vehicle checked by
a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System Indicator Comes On P. 565

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

2 VSA® On and Off P. 448

●

Electric Power
Steering (EPS)
System Indicator

Explanation

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation
●

●

Blinks for about one minute, and
then stays on if there is a problem
with the TPMS, or when a compact
spare tire is temporarily installed.

●

Blinks and remains on - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle
is fitted with a compact spare, get your
regular tire repaired or replaced and put
back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

●

Comes on if the TPMS is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected,
then re-connected.

●

Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

●

U.S.
models

Low Tire
Pressure/TPMS
Indicator

●

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe
place, check tire pressures, and inflate the
tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to
the recommended pressures - The
system needs to be calibrated.

Instrument Panel

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1.
May come on briefly if the ignition
switch is turned to ON (w *1 and
the vehicle is not moved within 45
seconds, to indicate the calibration
process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when:
- One or more tires’ pressures are
determined to be significantly
low.
- The system has not been
calibrated.

●

Message *

2 TPMS Calibration P. 452

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Instrument Panel

System Message
Indicator *

●

Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
High Beam
Indicator

●

Fog Light
Indicator *

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on along with a beep
when a problem is detected. A
system message on the driver
information interface appears at
the same time.

●

Blink when you operate the turn
signal lever.
Blink along with all turn signals
when you press the hazard
warning button.

●

Comes on when the high beam
headlights are on.

●

Comes on whenever the light
switch is on, or in AUTO * when
the exterior lights are on.

Lights On
Indicator
●

Explanation

Comes on when the fog lights are
on.

●

While the indicator is on, press the
(display/information) button to see the
message again.
Refer to the Indicators information in this
chapter when a system message appears
on the driver information interface. Take
the appropriate action for the message.
The driver information interface does not
return to the normal screen unless the
warning is canceled, or the
button
is pressed.
Does not blink or blinks rapidly - A
turn signal light bulb has blown. Change
the bulb immediately.

* Not available on all models

—

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 514, 517

—
●

If you remove the key from the ignition
switch*1 while the exterior lights are on, a
chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened.
—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Message *

—

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Immobilizer
System Indicator

●

Indicator

Security System
Alarm Indicator

Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Turn
the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1, pull the
key out*2, and then insert the key and turn
it to ON (w *1 again.
Repeatedly blinks - The system may be
malfunctioning. Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system or add
other devices to it. Electrical problems can
occur.

Message *

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Blinks if the immobilizer system
cannot recognize the key
information.

Explanation

—

Blinks when the security system
alarm has been set.
2 Security System Alarm P. 150

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the ignition on.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name
ECON Mode
Indicator

On/Blinking
●

●

Instrument Panel

CRUISE MAIN
Indicator *
●

CRUISE
CONTROL
Indicator *
Washer Level
Indicator *

●

Maintenance
Minder
Indicator *

●

Explanation

Comes on when you press the
ECON button.

2 ECON Button P. 416

Comes on when you press the
CRUISE button.

Comes on if you have set a speed
for cruise control.

Comes on when the washer fluid
gets low.
Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when the scheduled
maintenance is due soon.

●

2 Cruise Control* P. 417

—

2 Cruise Control* P. 417

—

Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid
P. 509

—

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 485

—

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.

Explanation
●

Brake
Depressing
Indicator *

Automatic Brake Hold System
●

●

—

Blinks when the electric parking
brake switch is pressed without
depressing the brake pedal while
the electric parking brake is in
operation.
Blinks when the automatic brake
hold button is pressed without
depressing the brake pedal while
the automatic brake hold is in
operation.
Blinks if the automatic brake hold
is automatically canceled while it
is in operation. The beeper
sounds.

●

Instrument Panel

Manual
transmission
models

●

Blinks while driving - Press the electric
parking brake switch with the brake pedal
depressed.
2 Parking Brake P. 457

Electric Parking Brake System
Continuously
variable
transmission
models

Message *

Blinks while driving - Press the
automatic brake hold button with the
brake pedal depressed.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 460

—
●

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the RDM system.

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

Comes on when the RDM system
shuts itself off.

●

Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high.
Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
The system activates when the
temperature inside the camera cools
down.

Road Departure
Mitigation (RDM)
Indicator *

2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420
●

●

Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with
a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back on
after you cleaned the area around the
camera.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
Indicator
(Green) *

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with ACC with LSF.

●

Comes on while driving - Have your
vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if anything covers the
radar sensor cover and prevents
the sensor from detecting a
vehicle in front.
May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)
ACC with LSF has been
automatically canceled.

●

When the radar sensor gets dirty, stop
your vehicle in a safe place, and wipe off
dirt using a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator does not go off even after
you clean the sensor cover.

●

Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.

●

Comes on when ACC with LSF is
in operation, but the temperature
inside the front sensor camera is
too high. ACC with LSF cancels
automatically. The beeper sounds
simultaneously.

●

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF) * P. 422
●

●

Message *

Instrument Panel

Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC)
with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)
Indicator
(Amber) *

Explanation

—

Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
Goes off - The camera has been cooled
down. Pressing the MAIN button can
resume the system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with
Low Speed Follow (LSF) * P. 422

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

Instrument Panel

Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Amber) *

Lane Keeping
Assist System
(LKAS) Indicator
(Green) *

On/Blinking
●

●

Comes on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch
to ON (w *1, then goes off.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the LKAS.

Explanation
●

●

Comes on when you press the
MAIN button.

●

Comes on when the LKAS is in
operation, or the LKAS button is
pressed, but the temperature
inside the front sensor camera is
too high. The LKAS cancels
automatically. The beeper sounds
simultaneously.

●

Comes on when the area around
the camera is blocked by dirt,
mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a
safe place, and wipe it off with a
soft cloth.
May come on when driving in bad
weather (rain, snow, fog, etc.)

●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
P. 440

●

Use the climate control system to cool
down the camera.
Goes off - The camera has cooled down
and the system is working normally.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if
the indicator and message come back on
after you cleaned the area around the
camera.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Message *

—

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

●

Comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then goes off.
Comes on when you deactivate
the CMBSTM. A driver information
interface message appears for five
seconds.
Comes on if there is a problem
with the CMBSTM.

●

Comes on if the CMBSTM is
deactivated temporarily after the
battery has been disconnected,
then re-connected.

●

Message *

Stays on constantly without the
CMBSTM off - Have your vehicle checked
by a dealer.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM (CMBSTM) * P. 465

Instrument Panel

Collision
Mitigation
Braking
SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator *

Explanation

Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go
off. If it does not, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

uuIndicatorsu

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
●

Comes on when the CMBSTM
system shuts itself off.

Explanation
●

Stays on - The area around the camera is
blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place, and wipe it off with
a soft cloth.

Instrument Panel

2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420
●

Collision
Mitigation
Braking
SystemTM
(CMBSTM)
Indicator *

●

Stays on - The temperature inside the
camera is too high. Use the climate control
system to cool down the camera. The
system activates when the temperature
inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420

* Not available on all models

Message *

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

93 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuIndicatorsuInformation Display Warning and Information Messages *

Information Display Warning and Information Messages *
The following messages appear only on the information display.
Message

Condition
●

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.

Explanation
●

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.
Instrument Panel

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Driver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *
The following messages appear only on the driver information interface. Press the
again with the system message indicator on.
Message

Condition
●

Instrument Panel

●

Canadian models

●

(display/information) button to see the message
Explanation

Appears if any door or the trunk is not completely
closed.
Appears if any door or the trunk is opened while
driving. The beeper sounds.

●

Goes off when all doors and the trunk are closed.

Appears when the washer fluid gets low.

●

Refill the washer fluid.
2 Refilling Window Washer Fluid P. 509

●

Appears when the scheduled maintenance is due
soon.
Consequently, Maintenance Due Now and
Maintenance Past Due follow.

2 Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver
Information Interface P. 491

Appears when there is a problem with the sensor on
the battery.

●

Appears along with the battery charging system
indicator when the battery is not charging.

●

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Checking the Battery P. 531

Turn off the climate control system and rear defogger to
reduce electricity consumption.
2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On P. 561

* Not available on all models

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message

Condition
●

Appears when the engine coolant temperature gets
abnormally high.

2 Overheating P. 559

●

Appears when you turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1 without fastening the driver’s seat belt.

●

Fasten the seat belt properly before you start to drive.

●

Appears if the automatic brake hold is automatically
canceled while it is in operation.

●

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

●

Appears when the automatic brake hold system is
turned off.

Instrument Panel

Continuously
variable transmission
models

Explanation

Manual transmission
models

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 460

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.

Continued

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message

Condition
●

Instrument Panel

Continuously
variable transmission
models

●

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is
pressed without wearing the driver’s seat belt.

●

Appears when the automatic brake hold button is
pressed without depressing the brake pedal while
the automatic brake hold is in operation.

●

Fasten the driver’s seat belt.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 460

Press the automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 460

Manual transmission
models

●

Explanation

Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while it is in operation.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 460
2 Parking Brake P. 457

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message
Continuously
variable transmission
models

Condition
●

Appears when the electric parking brake switch is
pressed without depressing the brake pedal while
the electric parking brake is in operation.

Explanation
●

Appears while driving - Press the electric parking
brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.
2 Parking Brake P. 457
Instrument Panel

Manual transmission
models

Models without smart entry system

Message

Condition
●

Appears when you open the driver’s door while the
ignition key is in ACCESSORY (q .

●

Appears when the ignition key is turned to
ACCESSORY (q from ON (w . (The driver’s door is
closed.)

●

Appears when you open the driver’s door while the
ignition key is in LOCK (0 .

Explanation
●

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 , then remove the
key.

—
●

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Continued

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with smart entry system

Message

Instrument Panel

Continuously
variable
transmission
models

●

Explanation

Appears after you set the power mode to
ACCESSORY or ON.

2 Starting the Engine P. 404
Manual
transmission
models

Except U.S.
models with
continuously
variable
transmission

Condition

●

Appears when the steering wheel is locked.

●

Move the steering wheel left and right while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button.

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message
Continuously
variable
transmission
models

Condition
●

Appears if you push the ENGINE START/STOP
button to turn the engine off without the shift lever
in (P .

Explanation
U.S. models
●

Move the shift lever to (P . The power mode changes to
VEHICLE OFF.

Canadian models

●

Move the shift lever to (P , then press the ENGINE
START/STOP button twice.

Appears when the power mode is in ACCESSORY.
—

●

Appears after the driver’s door is opened when the
power mode is in ACCESSORY.

●

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice with your
foot off the brake pedal (continuously variable
transmission) or the clutch pedal (manual transmission)
to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

●

Appears when you close the door with the power
mode in ON without the smart entry remote inside
the vehicle.

●

Disappears when you bring the smart entry remote back
inside the vehicle and close the door.

Appears when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak.

●

Instrument Panel

●

2 Smart Entry Remote Reminder P. 160

Replace the battery as soon as possible.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 533

Continued

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Message

Condition
Appears if the smart entry remote battery is too
weak to start the engine or the key is not within
operating range to start the engine.
A beeper sounds six times.

●

Appears when the starter system has a problem.

●

As a temporary measure, press and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button for up to 15 seconds while pressing
the brake pedal and manually start the engine.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Appears as soon as a problem is detected in the
smart entry system or push button starting system.

●

Appears constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

●

Instrument Panel

100

U.S.

Explanation
Bring the smart entry remote in front of the ENGINE
START/STOP button to be touched with.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 553

Canada

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

101 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with LED headlight

Message

Condition

Explanation

Appears if there is a problem with the light control
system.

●

Appears while driving - Manually turn the lights on,
and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

●

Appears if there is a problem with the headlights.

●

Appears while driving - The headlights may not be on.
When conditions allow you to drive safely, have your
vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Continued

Instrument Panel

●

101

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with ACC with LSF

Message

Condition
●

●

You can resume the set speed after the condition that
caused ACC with LSF to cancel improves. Press the RES/
+ button.

Instrument Panel

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422
●

●

102

Appears when ACC with LSF has been
automatically canceled.

Explanation

Appears when the distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead of you is too close while ACC
with LSF is in operation.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead of you is too close.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
driver’s seat belt is unfastened.

●

* Not available on all models

ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with ACC with LSF

Message

Condition
●

●

Appears when the vehicle in front of you starts
moving while your vehicle is stopped automatically
by ACC with LSF.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
shift lever is in any position other than (D or (S .

●

Appears when the vehicle is stopped on a very steep
slope while ACC with LSF is in operation.

●

* Not available on all models

Either press the RES/+ button or –/SET button, or
depress the accelerator pedal.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422

ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.

Instrument Panel

●

Explanation

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422

Continued

103

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with ACC with LSF

Message

Condition
●

Instrument Panel

●

104

Explanation

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.

●

Appears when the parking brake is applied
automatically while ACC with LSF is in operation.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
parking brake is applied.

●

Appears when pressing the –/SET button while the
vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is depressed.

●

Appears if ACC with LSF is canceled while your
vehicle is automatically stopped by ACC with LSF.

●

* Not available on all models

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422

ACC with LSF has been automatically canceled.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422
2 Parking Brake P. 457

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422
2 Parking Brake P. 457

ACC with LSF cannot be set.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422

Immediately depress the brake pedal.

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with ACC with LSF

Message

Condition
●

Flashes when the system senses a likely collision
with a vehicle in front of you.

Explanation
●

Take the appropriate means to prevent a collision (apply
the brakes, change lanes, etc.)

* Not available on all models

Continued

Instrument Panel

2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
P. 465
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF) * P. 422

105

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with LKAS

Message

Condition
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
●

●

Instrument Panel

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
lane.

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * P. 440

Appears when the vehicle is driving out of a detected
line. The steering wheel vibrates rapidly.

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System
●

Explanation

●

Keep the vehicle within the lane you are driving.

●

You can change the setting for the road departure
mitigation system. Normal, Wide, and Warning Only
can be selected.

2 Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * P. 436

When you selected Warning Only

- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

When you selected Normal or Wide

- The steering wheel vibrates rapidly when the
vehicle is drifting out of a detected line. The system
also steers the vehicle to help you remain within
your driving lane.
●

106

Blinks when you fail to steer the vehicle. The beeper
sounds simultaneously.

* Not available on all models

●

Operate the steering wheel to resume the LKAS.

uuIndicatorsuDriver Information Interface Warning and Information Messages *

Models with remote engine starter

Message

Condition
●

Appears when you unlock and open the driver’s
door while the engine is running by remote engine
start.

Explanation
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback * P. 406
Instrument Panel

* Not available on all models

107

Gauges and Displays
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, tachometer, fuel gauge, and related indicators.
They are displayed when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.
Instrument Panel

■ Tachometer

1Gauges
Models with information display

Press and hold the km/mile change knob until you
hear a beep. The speedometer reading and the
displayed measurements switch between mph and
km/h.
km/mile change knob

Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

Models with driver information interface

Press the
(display/information) button
repeatedly until the
icon is shown on the driver
information interface. Press ENTER, then press and
hold it again. The speedometer reading and the
displayed measurements will switch between mph
and km/h.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

108

uuGauges and DisplaysuGauges

■ Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.

1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE

You should refuel when the reading approaches E .
Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.

■ Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the
upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull
safely to the side of the road and allow engine
temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 559

Instrument Panel

The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from
the fuel gauge reading.

109

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *

Information Display *
The information display shows the odometer, trip meter, engine oil life and
maintenance service item codes, and other gauges.

■ Switching the Display
Press the

1Switching the Display
Each time you press the
knob, the information
display changes as follows:
Instant Fuel Economy,
Odometer, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

(TRIP) knob to change the display.

Instrument Panel

Instant Fuel Economy,
Range, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

(TRIP) Knob

Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy A, Trip Meter A,
Outside Temperature

Instant Fuel Economy, Average
Fuel Economy B, Trip Meter B,
Outside Temperature

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

Engine Oil Life

■ Trip Meter
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob.

■ Resetting a trip meter
To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.

110

* Not available on all models

1Trip Meter

knob. The trip meter is

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *

■ Average Fuel Economy

1Average Fuel Economy

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.

1Instant Fuel Economy Gauge
Press and hold the km/mile change knob to switch
the measurement.

Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100km.

■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.

Instrument Panel

■ Instant Fuel Economy Gauge

Press and hold the km/mile change knob to switch
the measurement.

2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 485

■ Range

1Range

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

Continued

Press and hold the km/mile change knob to switch
the measurement.

111

uuGauges and DisplaysuInformation Display *

■ Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■ Adjusting the outside temperature indicator
Instrument Panel

Adjust the temperature reading up to ± 5°F or ± 3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press and hold the
(TRIP) knob for 10 seconds or more while the outside
temperature is shown on the information display.
u The information display goes into temperature adjustment mode. The display
starts showing from -5°F to +5°F (U.S.) or -3°C to +3°C (Canada).
3. Release the
knob when the right adjustment amount is shown.
u The adjustment is complete.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

112

1Outside Temperature
The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

Driver Information Interface *
The driver information interface shows the odometer, trip meter, outside
temperature indicator, and other gauges.
It also displays important messages such as warnings and other helpful information.

■ Switching the Display

1Switching the Display

Press the
(display/information) button and press
display. Press ENTER to see detailed information.

Range & Fuel

Turbo Meter *

to change the

Navigation * &
Compass *

Maintenance
MinderTM

Customize *

Instrument Panel

You can edit, add, and delete the meter contents
using the audio/information screen.
2 Customizing the Meter P. 235

■ Main displays

Audio *

(Display/
Information) Button
Mail
Press
,
or
.
Press ENTER.

* Not available on all models

Average Speed &
Elapsed Time

Optional contents *:

Phone *

Warning
Messages
Speed Unit &
Disp OFF

Continued

113

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Trip computer
Press the

(TRIP) knob to change the display.

Instrument Panel

Odometer
Outside temperature

Trip A

Trip B

(TRIP)
Knob

■ Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

■ Trip Meter

1Trip Meter

Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A
and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

■ Resetting a trip meter

To reset a trip meter, display it, then press and hold the
reset to 0.0.

114

knob. The trip meter is

Switch between trip meter A and trip meter B by
pressing the
knob.

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Average Fuel Economy

1Average Fuel Economy

Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km.
The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel
economy is also reset.

You can change when to reset the average fuel
economy.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This distance is
estimated from the fuel economy of your previous trips.

■ Elapsed Time

1Elapsed Time
You can change when to reset the elapsed time.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

■ Average Speed

Instrument Panel

■ Range

1Average Speed
You can change when to reset the average speed.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

■ Engine Oil Life
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 485

Continued

115

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Outside Temperature

1Outside Temperature

Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

■ Adjusting the outside temperature display
Instrument Panel

Adjust the temperature reading up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading
seems incorrect.
Use the driver information interface’s customized features or audio/information
screen to correct the temperature.

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper.
Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can
affect the temperature reading when your vehicle
speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be
updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.

2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

■ Instant Fuel Economy
Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

■ Turbo Meter *
When the turbo charger is producing boost,
this meter shows the boost pressure.

■ Turn-by-Turn Directions *
Shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your destination linked with the
navigation system.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

116

* Not available on all models

1Turn-by-Turn Directions *
You can select whether the turn-by-turn display
comes on during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 308

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Audio *
Shows the current audio information.
2 Audio System Basic Operation P. 211, 229

■ Mail *
Instrument Panel

Shows the current mail information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * P. 362

■ Phone *
Shows the current phone information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * P. 339, 362

* Not available on all models

Continued

117

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

Models with color audio system

1Customized Features

■ Customized Features
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.

■ How to customize
Instrument Panel

Select the Vehicle Settings screen by pressing the
button while the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1, and the vehicle is at a complete stop. Select Vehicle Settings,
then press the ENTER button.

3 Button

Press to scroll upwards.

ENTER Button
Press to set your selection.

Button
Press to go back to the
previous display.

Button
Press to go to the next
display.

4 Button
Press to scroll downwards.

Button
Press to go to Vehicle Menu.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

118

To customize other features, press the 3 / 4
button.
2 List of customizable options P. 121
2 Example of customization settings P. 125

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

119 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Customization flow
Press the
button.
Vehicle Settings

ENTER

TPMS Calibration

Clock Setup

Instrument Panel

3
4

Adjust Clock
ENTER

3
4

Clock Display
3
4

Driver Assist System Setup

Forward Collision Warning Distance
ENTER

3
4

ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

ENTER

3
4

Meter Setup
3
4

ENTER

3
4

Language Selection
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Adjust Alarm Volume
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Speed/Distance Units
Tachometer

Continued

119

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

120 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

3
4

Lighting Setup

ENTER

Instrument Panel

3
4

Door Setup
3
4

Maintenance Reset
3
4

Default All
3
4

ENTER

Exit

Headlight Auto OFF Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

3
4

120

Interior Light Dimming Time

Auto Door Lock
ENTER

3
4

Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ List of customizable options
Setup Group
TPMS
Calibration

Customizable Features
—

Driver Assist
System
Setup

Calibrates the TPMS.

Selectable Settings
Cancel/Calibrate

Adjusts clock.

Instrument Panel

Adjust Clock
Clock Setup

Description

—

2 Clock P. 128

Clock Display

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

24h/12h*1/OFF

Forward Collision
Warning Distance

Changes at which distance the CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a
vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC range.

ON/OFF*1

Road Departure
Mitigation Setting

Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.

Normal*1/Wide/Warning
Only

Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is
suspended.

ON/OFF*1

*1:Default Setting

Continued

121

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

122 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

Setup Group

Instrument Panel

Meter Setup

*1:Default Setting

122

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Language Selection

Changes the displayed language.

English*1/French/Spanish

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A,
average fuel economy A, average speed A, and
elapsed time A.

When Refueled/IGN OFF/
Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B,
average fuel economy B, average speed B, and
elapsed time B.

When Refueled/IGN OFF/
Manually Reset*1

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,
warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

High/Mid*1/Low

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

mph∙miles*1/km/h∙km

Tachometer

Selects whether the tachometer come on the driver
information interface.

ON*1/OFF

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

123 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

Setup Group

Description

Selectable Settings

Interior Light Dimming
Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on
after you close the doors.

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Headlight Auto OFF
Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay
on after you close the driver’s door.

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Auto Interior
Illumination Sensitivity

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the
instrument panel when the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Auto Headlight ON With
Wiper ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when
the headlights automatically come on while the
headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

ON/OFF*1

Instrument Panel

Lighting
Setup

Customizable Features

*1: Default Setting

Continued

123

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

124 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

Setup Group

Customizable Features

With Vehicle Speed*1/Shift
from P/OFF

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically unlock.

When Driver’s Door Opens*1/
When Shifting Into Park/
When Ignition Switched
OFF/OFF

Key And Remote Unlock
Mode

Sets up either the driver’s door or all doors to unlock
on the first operation of the remote or built-in key.

Driver Door*1/ All Doors

Keyless Lock Answer
Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

ON*1/OFF

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock and
the security system to set after you unlock the
vehicle without opening any door.

90sec/60sec/30sec*1

Instrument Panel

Maintenance
Reset

—

Resets/Cancels the engine oil life display when you
have performed the maintenance service.

Cancel/All Due Items

Default All

—

Cancels/Resets all the customized settings as
default.

Cancel/Set

*1: Default Setting

124

Selectable Settings

Changes the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.

Auto Door Lock

Door Setup

Description

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

125 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

■ Example of customization settings
The steps for changing the “Trip A” Reset Timing setting to When Refueled are
shown below. The default setting for “Trip A” Reset Timing is Manually Reset.
1. Press the
button to select Vehicle
Settings, then press the ENTER button.
Instrument Panel

2. Press the 3 / 4 button until Meter Setup
appears on the display.
3. Press the ENTER button.
u Language Selection appears first in the
display.

Continued

125

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

126 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGauges and DisplaysuDriver Information Interface *

Instrument Panel

4. Press the 3 / 4 button until “Trip A”
Reset Timing appears on the display, then
press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select When Refueled, IGN Off,
Manually Reset, or Exit.

5. Press the 3 / 4 button and select When
Refueled, then press the ENTER button.
u The When Refueled Setup screen
appears, then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.

6. Press the 3 / 4 button until Exit appears
on the display, then press the ENTER
button.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the
normal screen.

126

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................. 128
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions .................. 130

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength * ... 132

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Outside .......................................... 133
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the
Inside ............................................. 140
Childproof Door Locks ..................... 142
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 143
Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 147
Security System
Immobilizer System .......................... 150
Security System Alarm...................... 150

Opening and Closing the Windows..... 153
Opening and Closing the Moonroof * ..... 156

* Not available on all models

Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch * ............................... 157
ENGINE START/STOP Button * ........... 158
Ignition Switch and Power Mode
Comparison ................................... 161
Turn Signals ..................................... 162
Light Switches.................................. 162
Fog Lights * ...................................... 165
Daytime Running Lights ................... 165
Wipers and Washers ........................ 166
Brightness Control ........................... 168
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror *
Button ........................................... 169
Adjusting the Steering Wheel........... 170

Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 171
Power Door Mirrors ......................... 172
Adjusting the Seats .......................... 173
Interior Lights/Interior Convenience
Items ................................................ 181
Heating System *
Using Automatic Heating................. 193
Automatic Heating Sensors.............. 195
Climate Control System *
Using Automatic Climate Control .... 196
Automatic Climate Control Sensors......202

127

Clock
Adjusting the Clock
Models without navigation system

1Adjusting the Clock

You can adjust the time in the clock display with the ignition switch in ON (w *1.

Models with navigation system

The clock is automatically updated through the audio
system, so the time does not need to be adjusted.

■ Adjusting the Time
Models with color audio system

■ Using the MENU/CLOCK button

Controls

1. Press and hold the MENU/CLOCK button.
u Adjust Clock is selected.
2. Rotate
to change hour, then press .
3. Rotate
to change minute, then press
.
4. To enter the selection, rotate
and select
Set, then press .

You can customize the clock display to show the 12
hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308
Models with Display Audio
Models with information display

You cannot adjust the time while the vehicle is
moving.
1Using the MENU/CLOCK button
Models with color audio system

These indications are used to show how to operate
the LIST/SELECT (List/Selector) knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

128

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Models with Display Audio

■ Using the Settings menu on the audio/
AUDIO

HOME

VOL

BACK

information screen
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Clock Adjustment.
4. Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
5. Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then
select OK.

1Using the Settings menu on the audio/information screen
The clock display is set to off by factory default.
You can turn the clock display on and off.
2 Customized Features P. 308

Controls

The clock is automatically updated when your
smartphone is connected to the audio system.
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock
displayed on the upper right corner of the display.
1. Touch the clock on the display for a few seconds.
2. Select Clock Adjustment.
3. Select 3 or 4 to change hour.
4. Select 3 or 4 to change minute, then select OK.

129

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key Types and Functions
This vehicle comes with the following keys:

1Key Types and Functions

■ Keys
Ignition key with
remote transmitter

Smart entry remote

Smart entry remote with
remote engine starter

Controls

Use the key to start and stop the engine, to lock and unlock the doors and to open
the trunk. You can also use the remote transmitter or smart entry system * to lock
and unlock the doors and to open the trunk.

■ Smart entry remote *
Release Knob

Built-in Key

130

* Not available on all models

All the keys have an immobilizer system. The
immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle
theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 150
The keys contain precision electronics.
Adhere to the following advice to prevent damage to
the electronics:
• Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
• Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.
• Keep the keys away from liquids.
• Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.
If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine
may not start, and the remote transmitter may not
work.
If the keys do not work properly, have them
inspected by a dealer.
Models with remote engine starter

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the
doors when the smart entry remote battery
becomes weak and the power door lock/
unlock operation is disabled.
To remove the built-in key, pull it out while
sliding the release knob. To reinstall the builtin key, push the built-in key into the smart
entry remote until it clicks.

You can remotely start the engine using the remote
engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start with Vehicle
Feedback * P. 406

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey Types and Functions

■ Key Number Tag

1Key Number Tag

Contains a number that you will need if you
purchase a replacement key.

Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a
safe place outside of your vehicle.
If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a
dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine,
contact a dealer.

Controls

131

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *

Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the smart entry remote when locking/
unlocking the doors and fuel fill door, opening the trunk, or starting the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking the doors, opening the trunk, or starting
the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable:
• Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment.
• You are carrying the smart entry remote together with telecommunications
equipment, laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices.
• A metallic object is touching or covering the smart entry remote.
Controls

132

* Not available on all models

1Low Smart Entry Remote Signal Strength *
Communication between the smart entry remote and
the vehicle consumes the smart entry remote’s
battery.
Battery life is about two years, but this varies
depending on regularity of use.
The battery is consumed whenever the smart entry
remote is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing
it near electrical appliances such as televisions and
personal computers.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside
■ Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

• Do not leave the smart entry remote in the vehicle
when you get out. Carry it with you.

• Even if you are not carrying the smart entry remote,
•

■ Locking the vehicle
Door Lock Button

If the interior light switch is in the door activated position,
the interior lights come on when you unlock the doors.
No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds.
Doors relocked: The lights go off immediately.
2 Interior Lights P. 181

Press the door lock button on the front door.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all the doors and trunk lock; and
the security system sets.

•
•

•

•
•

you can lock/unlock the doors while someone else
with the remote is within range.
The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if
the smart entry remote is within range.
If you grip a front door handle wearing gloves, the
door sensor may be slow to respond or may not
respond by unlocking the doors.
After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to
confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to
unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait
at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle,
otherwise the door will not unlock.
The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle
again and confirm that the door is unlocked before
pulling the handle.
Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may not
be able to lock/unlock the doors with the smart entry
remote if it is above or below the outside handle.
The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the door and door glass.

Controls

When you carry the smart entry remote, you
can lock/unlock the doors, fuel fill door, and
open the trunk.
You can lock/unlock the doors and fuel fill
door within a radius of about 32 inches (80
cm) of the outside door handle. You can open
the trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm)
radius from the trunk release button.

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

The light flash, beep, and door unlock mode settings
can be customized.
2 Customized Features P. 308

* Not available on all models

Continued

133

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto

Controls

134

The activation range of
the auto lock function is
about 8 feet (2.5 m)

lock)
When you walk away from the vehicle while
carrying the smart entry remote, the doors will
automatically lock.
The auto lock function activates when all
doors are closed, and the smart entry remote
is within about 8 feet (2.5 m) radius of the
outside door handle.
1. Exit vehicle while carrying smart entry
remote and close door(s).
2. While within about 8 feet (2.5 m) radius of
the vehicle.
u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated.
3. Carry the smart entry remote beyond about
5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain
outside this range for 2 or more seconds.
u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors will then lock.

1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory
default setting. The auto lock function can be set to
ON using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 308
After the auto lock function has been activated,
when you stay within the locking/unlocking
operation range, the indicator on the smart entry
remote will continue to flash until the doors are
locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the
operation range, the doors will automatically lock
approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock
function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function
activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will
be canceled.
When all doors have been closed and the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle, or if the smart entry
remote is not detected within about 8 feet (2.5 m) of
the vehicle, auto lock function will not be activated.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

To temporarily deactivate the function:
1. Set the power mode to OFF.
2. Open the driver’s door.
3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows:
Lock
Unlock
Lock
Unlock.
u The beeper sounds and the function is
deactivated.

Continued

The auto lock function does not operate when any of
the following conditions are met.
• The smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.
• A door or the hood is not closed.
• The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
• The smart entry remote is not located within a
radius of about 8 feet (2.5 m) from the vehicle
when you get out of the vehicle and close the
doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper
After the auto lock function has been activated, the
auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for
approximately two seconds in the following cases.
• The smart entry remote is put inside the vehicle
through a window.
• You are located too close to the vehicle.
• The smart entry remote is put inside the trunk.
If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are
carrying the smart entry remote. Then, open/close a
door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper
sounds once.

Controls

To restore the function:
• Set the power mode to ON.
• Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function
• Walk away at least more than about 8 feet
(2.5 m) away from the vehicle while
carrying the smart entry remote.

1Locking the vehicle (Walk away auto lock)

135

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the vehicle

Controls

Trunk Release Button

1Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start System *

Grab the driver’s door handle:
u The driver’s door and fuel fill door
unlocks.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Grab the front passenger’s door handle:
u All the doors unlock.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the
beeper sounds twice.
Press the trunk release button:
u The trunk unlocks and opens.
u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
2 Using the Trunk Opener P. 147

136

* Not available on all models

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the smart entry system,
the doors will automatically relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the smart entry
system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Using the Remote Transmitter

1Using the Remote Transmitter

■ Locking the doors

Lock Button
LED

Models with driver information interface

You can change the relock timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so
the operating range may vary depending on the
surroundings.
Models without smart entry system

Controls

Unlock Button

Press the lock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors
and fuel fill door lock, and the security
system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first
push):
u The beeper sounds and verifies the
security system is set.

If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of
unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter,
the doors will automatically relock.

The remote transmitter will not work when the key is
in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

You can lock or unlock doors using the remote
transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE
OFF.
All models

The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is
open.

Continued

137

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock button.
Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver’s door and fuel fill door unlock.
Twice:
u The remaining doors unlock.

1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works
varies, the battery is probably low.
If the LED does not come on when you press a
button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Button Battery P. 533
Models with driver information interface

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308
Controls

138

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

■ Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the keyless remote battery or the vehicle battery is dead, use the key instead of the
keyless remote.
Fully insert the key and turn it.
Lock

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door with a key, all the
other doors lock at the same time. When unlocking,
the driver’s door unlocks first. Turn the key a second
time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining
doors.
Models with driver information interface

You can customize the door unlock mode setting.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308
Controls

Unlock

■ Locking a Door Without Using a Key
■ Locking the driver’s door
Push the lock tab forward a or push the
master door lock switch in the lock direction
b, and close the door.

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key
When you lock the driver’s door, all the other doors
lock at the same time.
Make sure you have the key in your hand when you
lock the driver’s door or any of the other doors,
otherwise you may end up locking the key inside the
vehicle.

■ Locking the passenger’s doors
Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

■ Lockout prevention system
Models without smart entry system

The doors cannot be locked when the key is in the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

The doors cannot be locked when the smart entry remote is inside the vehicle.

139

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside
■ Using the Lock Tab
To Lock

Lock Tab

1Using the Lock Tab

■ Locking a door
Push the lock tab forward.

■ Unlocking a door
To Unlock

Controls

140

Pull the lock tab rearward.

When you lock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, all of the other doors lock at the same
time.
When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the
driver’s door, only the driver’s door will unlock.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

■ Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

Inner
Handle

1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

Pull the front door inner handle.
u The door unlocks and opens in one
motion.

The front door inner handles are designed to allow
front seat occupants to open the door in one motion.
However, this feature requires that front seat
occupants never pull a front door inner handle while
the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where
childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 142
Controls

Unlocking and opening the driver’s door from the inner handle unlocks all the other
doors.
To avoid all the doors to be unlocked, use the lock tab on the driver’s door to unlock,
then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only.
Models with driver information interface

If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the
Auto Door Unlock setting to Off using the driver information interface or
audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308
Models without driver information interface

If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the auto
door unlocking setting to off using the master door lock switch.
2 Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options P. 146

Continued

141

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

■ Using the Master Door Lock Switch
To Unlock

Press the master door lock switch in as shown
to lock or unlock all doors.

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using
the master lock switch, all the other doors lock/
unlock at the same time.

To Lock

Controls

Master Door
Lock Switch

Childproof Door Locks

1Childproof Door Locks

The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside
regardless of the position of the lock tab.

■ Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock
position, and close the door.

■ When opening the door
Unlock

Lock

142

Open the door using the outside door handle.

To open the door from the inside when the
childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the
unlock position, lower the rear window, put your
hand out of the window, and pull the outside door
handle.

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
Your vehicle locks and unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is
met.

■ Auto Door Locking
■ Drive lock mode
All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

■ Auto Door Unlocking

Models without driver information interface

You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the master door lock
switch.
2 Customizing the Auto Door Locking/
Unlocking Setting P. 144
Models with driver information interface

You can turn off or change to another auto door
locking/unlocking setting using the driver
information interface or audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

Controls

■ Driver’s door open mode
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

143

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

144 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

Customizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting
You can customize the auto door locking/unlocking setting to your liking using the master door lock switch.

■ List of the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Customizable Options
■ Auto door locking
Mode

Description

Controls

Drive Lock Mode*1

All doors lock when the vehicle’s speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

Off

The auto door locking is deactivated all the time.

■ Auto door unlocking
Mode
Driver’s Door Open
Mode*1
Models with
continuously variable
transmission

Description
All doors unlock when the driver’s door is opened.

All doors unlock when the shift lever is moved into (P with the brake pedal depressed.

Park Unlock Mode
Off
*1:Default setting

144

The auto door unlocking is deactivated all the time.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

145 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Locking Options
Steps

Drive Lock Mode*2
Apply the parking brake.

Models with continuously variable transmission

Off
Apply the parking brake.
Models with continuously variable transmission

Move the shift lever to (P .

Close the driver’s door.

Open the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

Press and hold the right side of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door Press and hold the right side of the master door
for more than five seconds. Release the switch after you hear a click twice.
lock switch on the driver’s door for more than
five seconds. Release the switch after you hear
one click.

Controls

Move the shift lever out of (P .

Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q *1 within 20 seconds.
u Customization is completed.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Default setting
Continued

145

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

146 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuCustomizing the Auto Door Locking/Unlocking Setting

■ Customizing Flow for Auto Door Unlocking Options
Steps

Driver's Door Open Mode*2
Apply the parking brake.

Models with continuously variable transmission

Move the shift lever out of (P .

Models with continuously variable transmission

Off

Park Unlock Mode

Apply the parking brake.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to (P .

Models with continuously variable
transmission

Move the shift lever to (P .

Controls

Close the driver’s door.

Open the driver’s door.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

Turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1.

Press and hold the left side of the master door lock switch on the driver’s door for more than five seconds. Release the switch
after you hear a click twice.

Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q *1 within 20 seconds.
u Customization is completed.

*1:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*2:Default setting

146

Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
■ Opening the trunk
Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
■ Closing the trunk
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage.
u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 72
Controls

Using the Trunk Opener
Pressing the trunk opener on the driver’s door
unlocks and opens the trunk.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 573

Trunk Opener

147

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button

Using the Trunk Release Button
Trunk Release Button

Models with smart entry system

Push up the release button on the trunk lid
after the doors are unlocked.
2 When You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 573

Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the
trunk if you carry the smart entry remote.
u Some exterior lights flash and the beeper
sounds.
Controls

Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for
approximately one second to unlock and open
the trunk.

Trunk Release Button

148

1Using the Trunk Release Button
Models with smart entry system

• A person who is not carrying the smart entry
remote can unlock the trunk if a person who is
carrying it is within range.
• The smart entry remote may not operate if it is too
close to the trunk.
• If you forget the remote inside, the beeper will
sound and the trunk will not close.
• If the beeper sounds after you close the trunk,
move the smart entry remote away from the trunk
and close again.

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Trunk Opener
The trunk release lever allows you to open the
trunk from inside for your safety.
Lever

1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be
shown how to use this feature.

Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow.

Controls

149

Security System
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from
starting the engine. Each key contains electronic transmitters that use electronic
signals to verify the key.

Controls

Pay attention to the following when inserting the key into the ignition switch or
pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button:
• Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ignition switch or the
ENGINE START/STOP button.
• Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object.
• Do not bring a key from another vehicle’s immobilizer system near the ignition
switch or the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as televisions
and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can
become magnetic.

Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly
opened. The alarm does not go off if the trunk or doors are opened with the key,
remote transmitter or smart entry system *.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the shift lever
is moved out of (P (continuously variable transmission models) or the hood is
opened before the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1.

■ When the security system alarm activates
The horn sounds intermittently and all the exterior lights flash.

■ To deactivate the security system alarm
Unlock the vehicle using remote transmitter, or smart entry system *. The system,
along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

150

* Not available on all models

1Immobilizer System
NOTICE

Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or
accidental movement of the vehicle.
Always take the key with you whenever you leave the
vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.
Canadian models only: Apply and hold the brake
pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after
the battery has been disconnected.
1Security System Alarm
The security alarm continues for a maximum of two
minutes until the security system deactivates.

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Setting the security system alarm
The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in LOCK (0 *1, and the key has been removed from the
ignition switch.
• The hood and trunk are closed.
• All doors are locked with the key, the remote transmitter, or smart entry system *.

1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone
is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can
accidentally activate when:
• Unlocking the door with the lock tab.
• Opening the trunk with the trunk release button on
the driver’s door or the emergency trunk opener.
• Opening the hood with the hood release.
Continuously variable transmission models

■ When the security system alarm sets

■ To cancel the security system alarm
The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
transmitter, smart entry system *, or the ignition switch is turned to ON (w *1. The
security system indicator goes off at the same time.

If the battery goes dead after you have set the
security system alarm, the security alarm may go off
once the battery is recharged or replaced.
If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by
unlocking a door using the remote transmitter or
smart entry system *.

Controls

The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks. When the
blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds, the security system alarm is set.

• Moving the shift lever out of (P .

Do not alter the system or add other devices to it.
Doing so may damage the system and make your
vehicle inoperable.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

151

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

152 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

■ Panic Mode
■ The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for
approximately one second, the following will
occur for about 30 seconds:
• The horn sounds.
• Some exterior lights flash.
Controls

Panic Button

■ Canceling panic mode
Press any button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

152

Opening and Closing the Windows
Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the ignition switch is in ON
(w *1, using the switches on the doors. The driver’s side switches can be used to
open and close all of the windows.
The power window lock button on the driver’s side must be switched off (indicator
off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver’s seat.

■ Opening/Closing Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function
Power Window
Lock Button

Indicator
Driver’s
Window
Switch

Front Passenger’s
Window Switch

3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's
hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from
the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you turn the ignition switch off.
Opening either front door cancels this function.

■ Automatic operation
To open: Push the switch down firmly.
To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

Auto Reverse
If a power window senses resistance when closing
automatically, it will stops closing and reverse
direction.

The window opens or closes completely. To
stop the window at any time, push or pull the
switch briefly.

The driver’s window auto reverse function is disabled
when you continuously pull up the switch.

Controls

When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you
can only operate the driver’s window. Turn the power window lock button on if a
child is in the vehicle.

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows

The auto reverse function stops sensing when the
window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

■ Manual operation
To open: Push the switch down lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it
until the desired position is reached.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

153

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

154 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing Windows without Auto-Open/Close
Function

Open

To open: Push the switch down.
To close: Pull the switch up.
Release the switch when the window reaches
the desired position.

Controls

■ Opening Windows and Moonroof * with the Remote
To open: Press the unlock button, and then
within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it. If
the windows and moonroof * stop midway,
repeat the procedure.

Unlock Button

154

* Not available on all models

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

155 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuOpening and Closing the WindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

■ Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof * with the Key

Close
Open

Release the key to stop the windows and
moonroof at the desired position. If you want
further adjustment, repeat the same
operation.

* Not available on all models

Controls

To open: Unlock the driver’s door with the
key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to
the central position, turn the key in the unlock
direction and hold it there.
To close: Lock the driver’s door with the key.
Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the
central position, turn the key in the lock
direction and hold it there.

155

Opening and Closing the Moonroof *
■ Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch
in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.
■ Automatic operation
To open: Pull the switch back firmly.
Open
To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Controls

Tilt

The moonroof will automatically open or close
all the way. To stop the moonroof midway,
touch the switch briefly.

■ Manual operation
To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.
To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and
hold it until the desired position is reached.

■ Tilting the moonroof up
To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof
switch.
To close: Push the switch forward firmly,
then release.

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof

3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on
someone’s hands or fingers can cause
serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of
the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE

Opening the moonroof in below freezing
temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice
can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The power moonroof can be operated for up to 10
minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse
function causes the moonroof to change directions,
then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the
moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully
closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers,
are clear of the moonroof.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to
operate the moonroof.
2 Opening Windows and Moonroof * with
the Remote P. 154
2 Opening/Closing the Windows and
Moonroof * with the Key P. 155

156

* Not available on all models

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
Ignition Switch *
1Ignition Switch *
Manual transmission models

(0 LOCK: Insert and remove the key in this

3 WARNING

position.
(q ACCESSORY: Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.
(w ON: This is the position when driving.

Remove the key from the ignition switch
only when parked.
Continuously variable transmission models

Controls

(e START: This position is for starting the engine.
The switch returns to ON (w when you let go of
the key.

Removing the key from the ignition switch
while driving locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

You cannot take the key out unless the shift lever is
in (P .
All models

If you open the driver’s door when the key is in LOCK
(0 or ACCESSORY (q , a warning buzzer will sound
to remind you to take the key out.
When this happens, the following messages appear
on the driver information interface *:
• In LOCK (0 : Remove Key From Ignition.
• In ACCESSORY (q : Turn Ignition Switch To Lock
(0) Position. The buzzer will stop when you take
the key out.
If the key won’t turn from LOCK (0 to ACCESSORY
(q , turn the key while moving the steering wheel left
and right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing
the key to turn.

* Not available on all models

157

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

ENGINE START/STOP Button *
■ Changing the Power Mode

1ENGINE START/STOP Button *
ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range

Continuously Variable Transmission

Manual Transmission

Operating Range

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
The button is off.
The steering wheel is locked*1.
The power to all electrical
components is turned off.
*2

Controls

ACCESSORY
The button blinks (in red).
Operate the audio system and
other accessories in this position.

You can start the engine when the smart entry
remote is inside the vehicle.
The engine may also run if the smart entry remote is
close to the door or window, even if it is outside the
vehicle.

ON
The button blinks (in red).
All electrical components can be
used.
Without pressing
the brake pedal

Without pressing
the clutch pedal

Press the button without the
shift lever in (P .

Press the button.

Shift to (P then press the button.

Shift to (P *2.

*1: Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission
*2: U.S. models

158

* Not available on all models

If the smart entry remote battery is weak, beeper
sounds and the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start
Button message appears on the driver information
interface.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 553
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON
when you get out.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

■ Automatic Power Off

1Changing the Power Mode

If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the shift lever in (P *1 and the
power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.
When in this mode:

Except U.S. continuously variable transmission models

If the power mode does not change from VEHICLE
OFF to ACCESSORY, press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while moving the steering wheel left and
right. The steering wheel will unlock, allowing the
mode to change.

Except U.S. continuously variable transmission models

The steering wheel does not lock.
Controls

All models

You cannot lock or unlock doors with the remote transmitter or the smart entry
system.
Press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice to switch the mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK).

*1: Continuously variable transmission models
Continued

159

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button *

■ Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver’s door when the power mode is set to ACCESSORY, a warning
beep sounds.

■ Smart Entry Remote Reminder

Controls

Warning buzzers may sound from inside and/
or outside the vehicle to remind you that the
smart entry remote is out of the vehicle. If the
buzzer continues even after the remote is put
back inside, place it within the system’s
operational range.

■ When the power mode is in ON
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and the driver’s door is closed,
warning buzzers sound from both inside and
outside the vehicle. A warning message on
the driver information interface notifies the
driver inside that the remote is out.

■ When the power mode is in
ACCESSORY
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the
vehicle, and all the doors are closed, a
warning buzzer sounds from outside the
vehicle.

160

1Smart Entry Remote Reminder
When the smart entry remote is within the system’s
operational range, and the driver’s door is closed, the
warning function cancels.
If the smart entry remote is taken out of the vehicle
after the engine has been started, you can no longer
change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or
restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote is
in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE
START/STOP button.
Removing the smart entry remote from the vehicle
through a window does not activate the warning
buzzer.
Do not put the smart entry remote on the dashboard
or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer
to go off. Under some other conditions that can
prevent the vehicle from locating the remote, the
warning buzzer may also go off even if the remote is
within the system’s operational range.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

161 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluIgnition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison
Ignition Switch
Position

LOCK (0)
(with/without
the key)

Without Smart Entry
System

●

VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK)

●
●

Engine is turned off.
Some electrical
components such as the
audio system and the
accessory power socket
can be operated.

ACCESSORY

ON (II)

●

Normal key position
while driving.
All electrical components
can be used.

Button is: Blinking

With Smart Entry
Button-Off
Button-Blinking
System and ENGINE ● Engine is turned off and ● Engine is turned off.
● Some electrical
power is shut down.
START/STOP
● The steering wheel is
components such as the
Button
locked*1.
audio system and the
● No electrical
accessory power socket
components can be
can be operated.
used.

START (III)

●

Use this position to start
the engine.
The ignition switch
returns to the ON (II)
position when you
release the key.

Controls

Power Mode

Engine is turned off and
power is shut down.
The steering wheel is
locked*1.
No electrical
components can be
used.

ACCESSORY (I)

START

ButtonButton-On
Blinking (engine is turned ● The mode automatically
returns to ON after the
off)
engine starts.
On (engine is running)
● All electrical components
can be used.

*1:Except U.S. models with continuously variable transmission

161

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
Right Turn

The turn signals can be used when the ignition
switch is in ON (w *1.

■ One-touch turn signal

Left Turn

When you lightly push up or down and release
the turn signal lever, the exterior turn signals
and turn signal indicator blink three times.
This feature can be used when signaling for a
lane change.

Controls

Light Switches

1Light Switches
Models with smart entry system

■ Manual Operation
High Beams

Flashing the high beams
Low Beams
Turns on parking/daytime
running lights, side marker, tail,
and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, parking, side
marker, tail, and rear license plate
lights

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on
and off, regardless of the power mode setting
or position of the ignition switch.
■ High beams
Push the lever forward until you hear a click.
■ Low beams
When in high beams, pull the lever back to
return to low beams.
■ Flashing the high beams
Pull the lever back, and release it.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

162

If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)
while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
Models without smart entry system

If you remove the key from the ignition switch while
the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver’s
door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 84
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off
because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is
abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) *

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) *

Automatic lighting control can be used when
the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
When you turn the light switch to AUTO, the
headlights and other exterior lights will switch
on and off automatically depending on the
ambient brightness.
u You can change the auto light sensitivity
setting.

The light sensor is in the location shown below.
Do not cover this light sensor with anything;
otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not
work properly.
Models without automatic
intermittent wiper

Light Sensor

Controls

Models with driver information interface

We recommend that you turn on the lights manually
when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas
such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

Models with automatic intermittent
wiper

Light Sensor

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

163

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

■ Headlight Integration with Wipers *
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within
a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO.
The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.

■ Automatic Lighting Off Feature
Controls

The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15
seconds after you remove the key or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK),
take the remote with you, and close the driver’s door.
u You can change the headlight auto off timer setting.
2 Customized Features P. 118

If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 with the headlight switch on, but do
not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in
the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver’s door. If you unlock
the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the
driver’s door, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

164

* Not available on all models

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control) *
Adjust the auto light sensitivity as follows:
Setting

The exterior lights come on
when the ambient light is at

MAX
HIGH
MID
LOW
MIN

Bright

Dark

2 Customized Features P. 118
1Headlight Integration with Wipers *
This feature activates while the headlights are off in
AUTO.
The instrument panel brightness does not change
when the headlights come on.
At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting
control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of
the number of wiper sweeps.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights *

Fog Lights *
When the low beam headlights are on, turn
the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

1Fog Lights *
When the fog lights are on, the indicator in the
instrument panel will be on.
They go off when the headlights turn off, or when
the daytime running lights are on.
2 Fog Light Indicator * P. 84

Fog Light Switch
Controls

Daytime Running Lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have
been met:
• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
• The headlight switch is off.
• The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Turning off the ignition
switch or setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running
lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when
the headlight switch is in AUTO * and it is getting darker outside.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

165

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Wipers and Washers
■ Windshield Wiper/Washer

1Wipers and Washers

The windshield wipers and washers can be
used when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ MIST
Pull to
use
washer.
Controls

Intermittent Time
Adjustment Ring *
MIST
OFF

The wipers run at high speed until you release
the lever.

■ Wiper switch (OFF, INT*2/AUTO*3, LO,
HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the
wiper settings.

Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper
operation.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps

LO: Low speed wipe

Sprays while you pull the lever toward you.
When you release the lever for more than one
second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two
or three more times to clear the windshield,
then stop.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
*2: Models with manual intermittent operation
*3: Models with automatic intermittent operation

* Not available on all models

If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are
operating intermittently, the length of the wipe
interval shortens.
When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation’s
shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become
the same.
All models

Higher speed, more sweeps

■ Washer

166

NOTICE

In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the
windshield.
Operating the wipers in this condition may damage
the wipers. Use the defroster to warm the
windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Models with adjustment ring

■ Adjusting wiper operation *

INT*2/AUTO*3
HI: High speed wipe

NOTICE

Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry.
The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber
blades will get damaged.

Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out.
The pump may get damaged.
The wiper motor may stop motor operation
temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation
will return to normal within a few minutes, once the
circuit has returned to normal.
If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such as
the build-up of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place.
Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and turn the ignition
switch to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1, then
remove the obstacle.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

■ Automatic Intermittent Wipers *
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the
windshield wipers sweep once, and go into
the automatic mode.

The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Rainfall Sensor

The wipers operate intermittently, at low
speed, or at high speed and stops in
accordance with the amount of rainfall the
rainfall sensor detects.

■ AUTO sensitivity adjustment
When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you
can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor
(using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will
operate in accordance with your preference.
Sensor sensitivity

Controls

Adjustment Ring

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers *

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the
following situation in order to prevent severe damage
to the wiper system:
• Cleaning the windshield
• Driving through a car wash
• No rain present

Low sensitivity

High sensitivity

* Not available on all models

167

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Brightness Control
When the parking lights are turned on and the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1, you can use the
brightness control knob to adjust instrument
panel brightness.
Brighten: Turn the knob to the right.
Dim: Turn the knob to the left.
Control Knob

Controls

You will hear a beep when the brightness
reaches minimum or maximum. Several
seconds after adjusting the brightness, you
will be returned to the previous screen.

■ Brightness level indicator
On information display

The brightness level is shown on the display
while you are adjusting it.

On driver information interface

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an
ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition
switch.

168

* Not available on all models

1Brightness Control
Instrument panel brightness varies, depending on
whether the exterior lights are on or off. The
instrument panel dims to reduce glare when they are
on.
Pressing the
(TRIP) knob or the
(display/
information) button * switches the display.
If you turn the knob to the right until the brightness
display is up to max, the beeper sounds. This cancels
the reduced instrument panel brightness when the
exterior lights are on.

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror button to defog the rear window
and mirrors when the ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
The rear defogger and heated door mirrors
Models with color audio system
automatically switch off after 10-30 minutes
depending on the outside temperature.
However, if the outside temperature is 32°F
(0°C) or below, they do not automatically
switch off.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror * Button
NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to damage the heating wires.
It is critical to wipe the window from side to side
along the defogger heating wires.

Controls

This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off
when the window has been defogged.
Also, do not use the system for a long period when
the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery,
making it difficult to start the engine.

Models with Display Audio

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

169

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

Controls

170

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you
can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.
1. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up.
To adjust
u The steering wheel adjustment lever is
under the steering column.
2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and
in or out.
u Make sure you can see the instrument
panel gauges and indicators.
3. Push the steering wheel adjustment lever
Lever
down to lock the steering wheel in position.
To lock
u After adjusting the position, make sure
you have securely locked the steering
wheel in place by trying to move it up,
down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel

3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while
driving may cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Make any steering wheel adjustments before you
start driving.

Adjusting the Mirrors
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving
position.

■ Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions *
Tab

Flip the tab to switch the position.
The night position will help to reduce the glare
from headlights behind you when driving
after dark.

1Adjusting the Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and
adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving.
2 Front Seats P. 173

Controls

Daytime
Position
Down
Night Position

■ Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
When driving after dark, the automatic
dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare
from headlights behind you, based in inputs
from the mirror sensor. This feature is always
active.

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror *
The auto dimming function cancels when the shift
position is in (R .

Down
Sensor

* Not available on all models

171

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

172 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAdjusting the MirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Power Door Mirrors
You can adjust the door mirrors when the
ignition switch is in ON (w *1.

■ Mirror position adjustment

Adjustment
Switch
Controls

172

Selector
Switch

L/R selector switch: Select the left or right
mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the
switch to the center position.
Mirror position adjustment switch: Press
the switch left, right, up, or down to move the
mirror.

Adjusting the Seats
Front Seats
Allow sufficient
space.

Move back.

■ Adjusting the Seat Positions

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result
in serious injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front
airbags as possible while maintaining
control of the vehicle.

Always make seat adjustments before driving.

Horizontal Position
Adjustment

* Not available on all models

3 WARNING

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow
at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.

■ Adjusting the front power seat *

Height Adjustment
(Driver’s seat only)

1Adjusting the Seats

Controls

Adjust the driver’s seat as far back as possible
while allowing you to maintain full control of
the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright,
well back in the seat and be able to
adequately press the pedals without leaning
forward, and grip the steering wheel
comfortably. The passenger’s seat should be
adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far
back from the front airbag in the dashboard
as possible.

Seat-back Angle
Adjustment

Continued

173

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

■ Adjusting the front manual seat(s) *

1Adjusting the front manual seat(s) *
Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and
forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Height Adjustment
(Driver side only)
Pull up or push down the lever
to raise or lower the seat.

Controls
Seat-back Angle
Adjustment
Horizontal Position
Adjustment
Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.

174

* Not available on all models

Driver’s seat is shown.

Pull up the lever to
change the angle.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuFront Seats

■ Adjusting the Seat-Backs

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable,
upright position, leaving ample space
between your chest and the airbag cover in
the center of the steering wheel.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the
occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the
chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a
seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in
serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position,
and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the
seat-back and your back.

Controls

The front seat passenger should also adjust
their seat-back to a comfortable, upright
position.

3 WARNING

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag
operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some type of adaptive
equipment may help.

175

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

■ Adjusting the Front Head Restraints

Controls

Front head restraints are most effective for
protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the
back of the occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. The tops of the
occupant’s ears should be level with the
center height of the restraint.
Position head in the center
of the head restraint.

To raise the head restraint:
Pull it upward.
To lower the head restraint:
Push it down while pressing the release
button.

176

1Adjusting the Front Head Restraints

3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints
reduces their effectiveness and increases
the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and
positioned properly before driving.
In order for the head restraint system to work
properly:
• Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
• Do not place any object between an occupant and
the seat-back.
• Install each restraint in its proper location.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuHead Restraints

■ Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints
Front head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint:
Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then push the release button, and pull the
restraint up and out.

3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the
head restraints can result in severe injury
during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before
driving.
Controls

To reinstall a head restraint:
Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height
while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked
in position.

1Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints

177

uuAdjusting the SeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their
seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their
seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Controls

178

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or
fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position

3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can
result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat,
with your feet on the floor.

uuAdjusting the SeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats
■ Folding Down the Rear Seats
Release
Lever *

1. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release
the lock.

1Folding Down the Rear Seats
The rear seat-back(s *) can be folded down to
accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the
trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 72

2. Fold the seat-back down.

Controls

Release Lever

To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it
locks.
When returning the seat-back to its original position,
push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder
belts are positioned in front of the seat-back.
Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press
against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the
weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work
improperly.
2 Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator P. 58
Make sure all items in the trunk or items
extending through the opening into the rear
seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly
forward if you have to brake hard.
The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they
do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold
down.

* Not available on all models

179

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

180 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAdjusting the SeatsuArmrest

Armrest
■ Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
To adjust:
Slide the armrest to desired position.

Controls

■ Using the Rear Seat Armrest *
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.

180

* Not available on all models

Interior Lights/Interior Convenience Items
Interior Lights
■ Interior Light Switches
■ ON

Front

Off

Door Activated Position

The interior lights come on regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.
■ Door activated
The interior lights come on in the following
situations:
• When any doors are opened.
• You unlock the driver’s door.

• You remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Models with smart entry system

Off

Models without smart entry system

• When you remove the key from the ignition switch
but do not open a door.
Models with smart entry system

• When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) but do not open a door.

Models without smart entry system

Door Activated Position

In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out
and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed.
The lights go off after 30 seconds in the following
situations:
• When you unlock the driver’s door but do not open it.

• When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF (LOCK).
■ OFF
The interior lights remain off regardless of
whether the doors are open or closed.

Models with driver information interface

You can change the interior lights dimming time.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

Controls

Rear

1Interior Light Switches

The interior lights go off immediately in the following
situations:
• When you lock the driver’s door.
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
Models without smart entry system

• When you close the driver’s door with the key in
the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

• When you close the driver’s door in ACCESSORY
mode.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF
(LOCK) mode, or without the key in the ignition
switch, the interior lights go off after about 15
minutes.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE
START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
Continued

181

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

■ Map Lights
Models without moonroof

Controls

182

Models with moonroof

1Map Lights

The map lights can be turned on and off by
pressing the lenses.

When the front interior light switch is in the door
activated position and any door is open, the map
light will not go off when you press the lens.

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Interior Convenience Items
■ Glove Box

1Glove Box

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury
to your passenger in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while
driving.
Controls

Continued

183

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

184 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Console Compartment
Your vehicle has a multi-function center
console. It includes a storage compartment,
an armrest, and a sliding tray *.
Slide the armrest to the rearmost position. Pull
the handle to open the console compartment.

Controls

You can put small items in the sliding tray *
located in the console compartment lid. Slide
the sliding tray forward or rearward.

Sliding Tray *

You can create more storage space by
removing the removable beverage holder tray
and a divider.

Removable
Beverage
Holder Tray

184

Divider

* Not available on all models

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Beverage Holders

1Beverage Holders
NOTICE

■ Front seat beverage holders
Are located in the console between the front
seats.
u Move the armrest rearward to use the
beverage holders.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders.
Hot liquid can scald you.

Controls

To place a short beverage container:
Move the removable beverage holder tray
forward.

Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and
electrical components in the interior.

To place a tall beverage container: Move
the removable beverage holder tray rearward.

■ Rear seat beverage holders *
Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat
beverage holders.

* Not available on all models

Continued

185

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

186 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Front seat

Controls

186

Rear seat

■ Door beverage holders

午後６時５分

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Accessory Power Socket

1Accessory Power Socket

The accessory power socket can be used when the ignition switch is in ACCESSORY
(q or ON (w *1.
Open the cover to use it.

NOTICE

Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter
element: The power socket can overheat.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 180
watts (15 amps) or less.
Controls

To prevent battery drain, use the power socket only
when the engine is running.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

187

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

Canadian models

■ Wireless

Charger *

Controls

To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.
Charge a compatible device on the area indicated by the
mark as follows:
1.
To
turn
the
system
on
and off, press and
(Power) Button
hold the
(power) button.
Green Indicator
u When the system is activated, the green
Amber Indicator
indicator light comes on.
2. Place the device you want to charge on the
charging area.
u The system will automatically start
charging the device, and the amber
indicator light will come on.
u Make sure that the device is compatible
with the system and placed with the
chargeable side in the center of the
Charging Area
charging area.
3. When charging is completed, the green
indicator light will come on.
u Depending on the device, the amber
indicator light will stay on.

1Wireless Charger *

3 CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad
and the device to be charged will get
hot and can burn you.
• Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the
device.
• Be sure the surface is clear of dust and
other debris before charging.
• Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks,
etc.) on the charger and the device.
• Do not use oil, grease, alcohol,
benzine or thinner for cleaning the
charge pad.
• Do not cover the system with towels,
clothing, or other objects while
charging etc.
• Avoid spraying aerosols which may
come in contact with the charge pad
surface.
This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the
system for a long time when the engine is not
running. This may weaken the battery, making it
difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the user’s manual
that came with the compatible device you want to charge.

188

* Not available on all models

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ When charging does not start
Perform one of the solutions in the following table.
Indicator

Amber

Blinking
simultaneously

Blinking

NOTICE

Solution

There is an obstacle(s) between
the charging area and the
device.

Remove the
obstacle(s).

The device is not within the
charging area.

Move the device to the
center of the charging
area where
is
located.

The wireless charger is faulty.

Contact a dealer for
repairs.

Do not place any magnetic recording media or
precision machines within the charging area while
charging.
The data on your cards such as credit cards can be
lost because of the magnetic effect. Also precision
machines such as watches can go wrong.
“Qi” and
marks are the registered trademarks
owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
• The device is already fully charged.
• The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging.
• You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic wave or noises, such as a TV
station, electric power plant, or gas station.

Controls

Green
&
Amber

Cause

1Wireless Charger *

A device may not charge if the size or shape of its
chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the
charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.
During the charging phase, it is normal for the
charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
• All the doors and the trunk are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning
of the smart entry system.
• The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a
charging area.

* Not available on all models

Continued

189

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Coat Hooks

1Coat Hooks

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab
handle. Pull it down to use it.

Controls

190

There are coat hooks on the left and right
door pillars.

The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy
items.

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Front Seat Heaters *

1Front Seat Heaters *

The ignition switch must be in ON (w *1 to use
the seat heaters.

3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.

Press the seat heater button:
Once - The HI setting (three indicators on)
Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on)
Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on)
Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)

Controls

Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

191

uuInterior Lights/Interior Convenience ItemsuInterior Convenience Items

■ Rear Seat Heaters *

1Rear Seat Heaters *

The power mode must be in ON to use the
seat heaters.
There is no heater in the rear center seating
position.

Controls

The indicator for your setting comes on while
the seat heater is in use. Press the button on
the opposite side to turn the heater off. The
indicator goes off.
While in HI, the heater cycles on and off.
When a comfortable temperature is reached,
select LO to keep the seat warm.

3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when
using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense
temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes,
lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or
with sensitive skin should not use seat
heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the
engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may
be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously and
does not automatically turn off.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

192

* Not available on all models

Heating System *
Using Automatic Heating
The automatic heating system maintains the interior temperature you select. The
system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the
interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Temperature
Control Dial

(ON/OFF)
Button
Fan Control
Dial

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that were pressed will be
controlled automatically.

When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

(Fresh Air) Button

Floor vents

Controls

(Recirculation) Button

Dashboard
and floor
vents

If any buttons are pressed while using the heating
system in auto, the function of the button that was
pressed will take priority.

To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.

AUTO Button

Dashboard
vents

1Using Automatic Heating

Floor and
defroster
vents

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
3. Press the
(on/off) button to cancel.

* Not available on all models

Continued

193

uuHeating System * uUsing Automatic Heating

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
Press the
(recirculation) or
(fresh air) button to switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.

Controls

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
Pressing the
(windshield defroster) button
automatically switches the system to fresh air
mode.
Press the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.

1Using Automatic Heating
Pressing the
button switches the heating system
between on and off. When turned on, the system
returns to your last selection.
While in the ECON mode, the heating system has
greater temperature fluctuations.
1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows
For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the
2. Press the

194

1To rapidly defrost the windows

button.
button.

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

195 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuHeating System * uAutomatic Heating Sensors

Automatic Heating Sensors
Sensor

Controls

Sensor

The automatic heating system is equipped
with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid
on them.

195

Climate Control System *
Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select.
The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers
the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
U.S. models with color audio system

Models with Display Audio
Models without SYNC button

1Using Automatic Climate Control
Models with Display Audio

Press the CLIMATE button to display A/C, MODE, fan
control information on the audio/information screen
for several seconds. Select icon to turn on or off A/C,
change the vent mode, or change the fan speed.
If any buttons are pressed while using the climate
control system in auto, the function of the button
that was pressed will take priority.

Controls

The AUTO indicator will go off, but functions
unrelated to the button that were pressed will be
controlled automatically.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the
fan may not start immediately when the AUTO
button is pressed.

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.
3. Press the
(on/off) button to cancel.

196

* Not available on all models

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down
more rapidly by partially opening the windows,
turning the system on AUTO, and setting the
temperature to low. Change the fresh mode to
recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper
limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

1Using Automatic Climate Control

Models with Display Audio

Pressing the
button switches the climate control
system between on and off. When turned on, the
system returns to your last selection.

Models with SYNC button

While in the ECON mode, the climate control system
has greater temperature fluctuations.

Controls

Use the system when the engine is running.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver’s side or passenger’s side control
dial.
3. Press the
button to cancel.
Continued

197

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

198 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes
U.S. models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio
Models with SYNC button

Controls

Press the
(recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on
environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior through
the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in
fresh air mode in normal situations.
Models with Display Audio
Models without SYNC button

Press the
(recirculation) or
(fresh air) button to switch the mode
depending on environmental conditions.
Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle’s interior
through the system.
Fresh air mode (indicator on): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system
in fresh air mode in normal situations.

198

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Pressing the
(windshield defroster) button
turns the air conditioning system on and
automatically switches the system to fresh air
mode.
Press the
button again to turn off, the
system returns to the previous settings.

Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower
limit.
When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the
windshield may fog up.
If the side windows fog up, adjust the vents so that
the air hits the side windows.

Controls

Continued

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows before driving.

199

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ To rapidly defrost the windows
1. Press the
2. Press the

Controls

200

1To rapidly defrost the windows

button.
button.

After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air
mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode,
the windows may fog up from humidity. This
impedes visibility.

uuClimate Control System * uUsing Automatic Climate Control

■ Synchronized Mode *

When the system is in dual mode, the driver’s side
temperature and the passenger’s side temperature
can be set separately.

Passenger
Side
Temperature
Control Dial

Controls

Driver Side
Temperature
Control Dial

1Synchronized Mode *

SYNC Button

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver’s side and the passenger’s
side in synchronized mode.
1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system switches to synchronized mode.
2. Adjust the temperature using the driver’s side temperature control dial.
Press the SYNC button to return to dual mode.

* Not available on all models

201

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

202 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuClimate Control System * uAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors
Sensor

Controls

202

Sensor

The automatic climate control system is
equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill
any liquid on them.

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System
About Your Audio System................ 204
USB Port(s) ....................................... 205
Audio System Theft Protection ......... 206
Audio Remote Controls.................... 207
Models with color audio system

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 211
Audio/Information Screen ................ 212
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 216
Display Setup ................................... 217
Playing the AM/FM Radio ................. 218
Playing an iPod ................................ 220

* Not available on all models

Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 223
Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 226
Models with Display Audio

Audio System Basic Operation ........ 229
Audio/Information Screen ................ 230
Adjusting the Sound ........................ 251
Display Setup ................................... 252
Voice Control Operation .................. 254
Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 258
Playing SiriusXM® Radio * ................. 262
Playing an iPod ................................ 270
Song By VoiceTM (SBV)...................... 273
Playing Pandora® *............................ 277

Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 279
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 282
HondaLink® ..................................... 284
Wi-Fi Connection............................. 289
Siri Eyes Free.................................... 291
Apple CarPlay .................................. 292
Android Auto .................................. 295
Audio Error Messages ...................... 299
General Information on the Audio
System ............................................. 302
Customized Features........................ 308
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * ... 339, 362

203

Audio System
About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service *. It can also
play USB flash drives, and iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the
remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface *.

1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio * is available on a subscription basis
only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio *,
contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 302
SiriusXM® Radio * is available in the United States and
Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.
SiriusXM® * is a registered trademark of SiriusXM
Radio, Inc.

Features

iPod

USB Flash Drive
Remote Controls

204

* Not available on all models

iPod, iPhone and iTunes are trademarks of Apple Inc.
State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a
vehicle.

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)

USB Port(s)
Install the iPod USB connector or the USB flash
drive to the front USB port.

1USB Port(s)

• Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the

Models with color audio system

u The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio
files on a USB flash drive and connecting
a cellular phone and charging device.
Models with
color audio
system

Models with
Display Audio

Models with Display Audio

u The USB port (1.5A) is for charging
devices, playing audio files and
connecting compatible phones with
Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

•
•
•
•

In the console compartment

■ In the console compartment

The USB port (1.0A) is for playing audio files
on the USB flash drive and connecting a
cellular phone and charging device.
u Move the removable beverage holder
tray rearward.

If the audio system does not recognize the iPod, try
reconnecting it a few times or reboot the device. To
reboot, follow the manufacturer’s instructions
provided with the iPod or visit www.apple.com/ipod.

Features

•
*

vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may
damage it.
We recommend using an extension cable with the
USB port.
Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be
damaged.
We recommend keeping your data backed up
before using the device in your vehicle.
Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.

USB charge (1.5A)

The front USB port can supply up to 1.5A of power.
It does not output 1.5A unless requested by the
device.
For amperage details, read the operating manual of
the device that needs to be charged.
Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (q or ON
(w *1 first.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the
port may generate noise in the radio you are listening
to.

205

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

206 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as
when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system
may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.

■ Reactivating the audio system
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Turn on the audio system.
3. Press and hold the audio system power button for more than two seconds.
u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize
the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.
Features
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

206

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls
Models with information display

1Audio Remote Controls

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving.
SOURCE Button
SOURCE Button
Cycles through the audio modes as follows:
(+ Button
FM AM USB iPod Bluetooth® Audio

Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be available.

Button

(+ (- (Volume) Buttons
Press (+ : To increase the volume.
Press (- : To decrease the volume.

Button

(- Button

Continued

Features

Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next station with strong reception.
Press and hold : To select the previous station with strong reception.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

207

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Models with driver information interface

Features

208

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on
the driver information interface.
3 4 Buttons
(+ (- Bar
3 or 4 to cycle through the audio
Press
ENTER Button
3 Button
mode as follows:
FM AM SiriusXM® * USB iPod
Button
Bluetooth® Audio Pandora® * Apps *
Button
Audio Apps *
4 Button
• When listening to the radio and SiriusXM® *
1. Press ENTER to switch the display to a
Button
preset list you stored in the preset buttons.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select a preset, then press
ENTER.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
1. Press ENTER to display the folder list.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select a folder.
3. Press ENTER to display a list of tracks in that
folder.
4. Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press
ENTER.
You can also swipe up or down to scroll
through the list of tracks alphabetically.

* Not available on all models

1Audio Remote Controls
Some modes appear only when an appropriate
device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some functions may not be available.
Press the
(Hang-up/back) button to go back
to the previous command or cancel a command.
Press the
button to switch display.
2 Switching the Display P. 230

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

209 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

Features

• When listening to an iPod
1. Press ENTER to display the iPod music list.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select a category.
3. Press ENTER to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press
ENTER.
u Press ENTER and press 3 or 4
repeatedly until the desired mode you
want to listen to is displayed.
You can also swipe up or down to scroll
through the list of tracks alphabetically.
• When listening to Internet Radio *
1. Press ENTER to display the station list.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select an item, then press
ENTER.
• When listening to Bluetooth® Audio
1. Press ENTER to display the track list.
2. Press 3 or 4 to select a track, then press
ENTER.

209

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

210 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

(+ (- (Volume) Bar
Press (+ : To increase the volume.
Press (- : To decrease the volume.
Models with Display Audio

Slide your finger up or down to increase or decrease the volume, respectively.
Swipe down quickly to mute the volume and swipe up to cancel the mute.

Features

210

Buttons
• When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station.
Press : To select the previous preset radio station.
Press and hold : To select the next strong station.
Press and hold : To select the previous strong station.
• When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, or Bluetooth® Audio
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song.
• When listening to a USB flash drive
Press and hold : To skip to the next folder.
Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.
• When listening to Internet radio *
Press : To skip to the next song.
Press and hold : To select the next station.
Press and hold : To select the previous station.

* Not available on all models

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with color audio system

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w .
Use the selector knob or MENU/CLOCK
(Sound)
(Day/Night)
button to access some audio functions.
Button
Button

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
Press

Press
to switch between the normal and
extended display for some functions.

(Back)
Button

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press
to set
your selection.
MENU/CLOCK button: Press to select any
mode.
The available mode includes the wallpaper,
display, clock, language setup, and play
modes. Play modes can be also selected from
scan, random, repeat, and so on.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.
(Sound) button: Press to select the sound setting mode.
(Day/Night) button: Press to change the audio/information screen
brightness.
Press
, then adjust the brightness using
.
u Each time you press
, the mode switches between the daytime mode,
nighttime mode and OFF mode.
Menu Display

Menu Items
2 Adjust Clock P. 128
2 Wallpaper Setup P. 214
2 Display Setup P. 217
2 Scan P. 219, 225
2 Play Mode P. 222, 225
2 RDS Settings P. 219
2 Bluetooth P. 226
Press the SOURCE,
,
,
or
button on the
steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 207

Features

MENU/
CLOCK
Button
Selector Knob

to select.
to enter.

211

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

212 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this screen, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display

Audio/Information Screen

Audio
Features
Clock/Wallpaper

212

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

213 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Audio
Shows the current audio information.
■ Clock/Wallpaper
Shows a clock screen or an image you import.
■ Change display
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
u If you want to return to the audio display, select Audio.
Features

Continued

213

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to three images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.

• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
•
•
•
•

2 USB Port(s) P. 205

Features

214

2. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
3. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press
.
5. Rotate
to select Import, then press .
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Rotate
to select a desired picture, then
press .
u The selected picture is displayed.
7. Press
to save the picture.
8. Press
to select OK.
9. Rotate
to select a location to save the
picture, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper
setting screen.

•
•

in the USB flash drive’s root directory. Images in a
folder cannot be imported.
The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
The individual file size limit is 2 MB.
The maximum image size is 1,920 x 936 pixels. If
the image size is less than 480 × 234 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
Up to 255 files can be selected.
If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Select, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate
to select a desired wallpaper, then press

1Wallpaper Setup
To go back to the previous screen, press the
(Back) button.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.

Features

■ To view wallpaper once it is set
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Display Change, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to set, then press

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select Wallpaper, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Delete, then press .
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
5. Rotate
to select a wallpaper that you want to delete, then press
6. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
u The display will return to the wallpaper setting screen.

215

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
(Sound) Button

Press the
(sound) button, and rotate
to scroll through the following choices:

LIST/SELECT (Selector) Knob
TRE is selectable.

Features

BAS

Bass

TRE

Treble

FAD

Fader

BAL

Balance

SVC

Speed-sensitive
Volume
Compensation

Rotate
to adjust the sound setting, then
press .

216

1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC has four modes: Off, Low, Mid, and High.
SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle
speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As
you slow down, audio volume decreases.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme

You can change the Contrast and Black level
settings in the same manner.

Features

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Display Adjustment,
then press .
4. Rotate
to select Brightness, then press
.
5. Rotate
to adjust the setting, then press
.

1Changing the Screen Brightness

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Color Theme, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select the setting you want,
then press .

217

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

218 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

Playing the AM/FM Radio

RADIO Button
Press to select a band.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

VOL/
(Volume/power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system
on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Turn to tune the radio frequency.
Press, and then turn to select an
item. After that, press again to
make your selection.

/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to search up and down
the selected band for a station with a strong
signal.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.

Preset Buttons (1-6)
To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Pick a preset button and hold it until you hear a beep.
To listen to a stored station, select a band, then press the preset button.

218

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying the AM/FM Radio

■ Radio Data System (RDS)

1Playing the AM/FM Radio

Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Press
while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select the station, then press .

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
the preset memory.
Switching the Audio Mode
Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 207

■ Update List
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Press
while listening to an FM station.
2. Rotate
to select Update List, then press

The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

.
1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

Features

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select RDS Settings, then press .
4. Rotate
to select Radio Text, then press .
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Scan, then press .
To turn off scan, press

219

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA
button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 205

USB Indicator
Appears when an iPod is connected.

Audio/Information Screen

Album Art

Features

220

MEDIA Button
Press to select iPod
(if connected).
VOL/
(Volume/power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Turn to change songs.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change songs.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.

Play Button
Press to resume a Pause Button
song.
Press to pause a
song.

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous
display or cancel a setting.

Play Mode Buttons
Press to select a play mode.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List with the
Selector Knob

1. Press

to display the iPod music list.

1Playing an iPod
Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 299

Item
Selection

2. Rotate

to select a category.

Features

Category
Selection

3. Press
to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
u Press
and rotate
repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.

Continued

221

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons
Features

222

■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle Album: Plays all available albums in
a selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Shuffle All: Plays all available songs in a
selected category (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
genres, or composers) in random order.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current
song.
You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
.
Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
To turn it off, rotate
to select Normal Play, then
press
.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 205

USB Indicator
Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

MEDIA Button
Press to select USB flash drive
(if connected).
VOL/
(Volume/power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to select an item,
then press to set your selection.

/
(Seek/Skip) Buttons
Press
or
to change files.
Press and hold to move rapidly within a file.

MENU/CLOCK Button
Press to display the menu items.

Play Mode Buttons (1-6)
Press to select a play mode.

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
Continued

223

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from a Folder with the Selector Knob
1. Press

to display a folder list.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 302
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights
management (DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and
then skips to the next file.

Folder
Selection

2. Rotate

to select a folder.

Features
Track
Selection

224

3. Press
to display a list of files in that
folder.
4. Rotate
to select a file, then press .

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 299

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, random, and scan modes when playing a file.
Available mode icons appear above the play
mode buttons.
Press the button corresponding to the mode
you want to select.

Play Mode Buttons

Play Mode Menu Items
Repeat
Repeat One Folder: Repeats all files in the
current folder.
Repeat One Track: Repeats the current file.
Random
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the
current folder in random order.
Random All: Plays all files in random order.
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling
of the first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of
all files in the current folder.

Features

■ To turn off a play mode
Press the selected button.

1How to Select a Play Mode

You can also select a play mode by pressing the
MENU/CLOCK button.
Rotate
to select Play Mode, then press
.
Rotate
to select a mode, then press
.
To turn it off, rotate
to select Normal Play, then
press
.

225

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible
phone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 345
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

MEDIA Button
Press to select
Bluetooth® Audio.

Audio/Information Screen

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible with the system.
For a list of compatible phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data
device functions while driving.

Features

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.
If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there will be a delay before the system begins to play.

VOL/
(Volume/
Power) Knob
Press to turn
the audio
system on and
off.
Turn to adjust
the volume.

Pause Button (Preset 2)
Press to pause a file.
Play Button (Preset 1)
Press to resume a file.
/
Press

226

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio

(Seek/Skip) Buttons
or
to change files.

MENU/CLOCK
Button
Press to
display the
menu items.

In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some
devices.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
MEDIA Button

Pause Button
Play Button

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files

1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the
Bluetooth® Audio Source is selected.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating
instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some
phones.
If any audio device is connected to the auxiliary input
jack or USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA
button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio
system.

■ To pause or resume a file
Press the Play or Pause button to select a mode.

Continued

Features

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.

227

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the
Selector Knob

1. Press

Features

Category
Selection

Item
Selection

228

2. Rotate

to display the music search list.

to select a category.

3. Press
to display a list of items in the
category.
4. Rotate
to select an item, then press .
u Press
and rotate
repeatedly until a
desired item you want to listen is
displayed.

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List with the Selector
Knob
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

Audio System Basic Operation
Models with Display Audio

1Audio System Basic Operation

To use the audio system function, the ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or
ON (w *1.
: Select to go to the home screen.
(Home) Icon
(Day/Night) Button

2 Switching the Display P. 230

: Select to display available options
including Sound, View Radio Text, Music
Search, and playback modes.
: Select to go back to the previous screen
when the icon is illuminated.

Audio Menu Items
2 Station List P. 259, 260
2 Music Search List P. 271, 280
2 Scan P. 260, 261, 269, 281
2 Play Mode P. 272, 281

(Back) Icon

button: Press to change the audio/
information screen brightness.
Press
once and select (- or (+ to make
an adjustment.
u Each time you press
, the mode
switches between daytime, nighttime
and off.

Features

(Menu) Icon

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

229

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various
setup options.

■ Switching the Display
■ Using the
Press the

button
(display) button to change the display.

Features
(Display) Button

230

Driver Information
Interface

1Using the

button

You can edit, add, and delete the contents shown on
the driver information interface.
2 Customizing the Meter P. 235

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Using the audio/information screen

1Using the audio/information screen
Home Screen
Models without navigation system

Touchscreen operation
• Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
• Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
• You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
• Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.

Models with navigation system

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting.
2 Customized Features P. 330
Features

Select
to go to the home screen.
Select Phone, Info, Audio, Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone
Connection (Apple CarPlay, Android Auto), App List, or Instrument Panel.

■ Phone
Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * P. 362

* Not available on all models

Continued

231

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Info
Displays Trip Computer or Clock/Wallpaper. Select
on the Info Menu screen
to see all available options: Trip Computer, Voice Info, Clock/Wallpaper and
System/Device Information.

Features

Trip Computer:
• Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information.
• History of Trip A tab: Displays information for the three previous drives. The
information is stored every time you reset Trip A.
To delete the history manually, select Delete History on the History of Trip A
tab. The confirmation message appears on the screen, then select Yes.
Voice Info: Displays the all commands list.
Clock/Wallpaper: Displays the clock and wallpaper.
System/Device Information:
• System Info: Displays the software version of the audio system.
• USB Info: Displays the memory usage of the USB device.

■ Audio
Displays the current audio information.

■ Settings
Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 308

■ Navigation *
Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

232

* Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ HondaLink
Connects with your smartphone*1 to play personalized music, information, and
social media streams.
2 HondaLink® P. 284

■ Smartphone Connection
Connects with your smartphone*1 and allows some apps on your smartphone to be
used on the audio system.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 292
2 Android Auto P. 295

Features

■ App List
Adds or removes apps or widgets on the home screen.
2 Home Screen P. 241

■ Instrument Panel
Selects from three customizable settings for the driver information interface.

*1: Available on specific phones only. Check handsfreelink.honda.com for U.S. and
www.handsfreelink.ca for Canada for compatible phones and hondalink.com for U.S. and
honda.ca/hondalink for Canada for feature details.
Continued

233

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

234 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Changing the Home Screen Icon Layout
1. Select
.
2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
4. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Features

234

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Customizing the Meter

1Customizing the Meter

You can edit, add, or delete the meter contents on the driver information interface.
1.
2. Settings
3. System
4. Configuration of Instrument Panel

You can store up to three customized configurations.
To select or customize a configuration, press Swap
Config..
When you select Swap Config. during
customization, the settings you changed will be
saved.
When you select
during customization, the
settings you changed will not be saved and you will
be returned to the Configuration of Instrument
Panel screen.

Features

Continued

235

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Editing order

1Editing order

To change the order of the icons on the driver information interface, first select:
1. Edit Order

Edit Order

Features

2. Select the icon you want to move.
u You will see arrows on both sides of the
selected icon.

Select

3. Select the left or right arrow repeatedly to
move the icon to your desired position.
4. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the
Configuration of Instrument Panel
screen.
Arrow icons

236

You can use an alternative method to change the
order of the icons. First select:
1. Edit Order
2. Select and hold the icon you want to move.
3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to
be.
4. Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Configuration of
Instrument Panel screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Adding contents
You can add up to 10 contents on the driver information interface. To add contents,
first select:
1. Add

1Adding contents
Icons that are grayed out cannot be selected.
If an icon has a plus mark in the upper-right corner, it
means that the icon has already been added.

Add
Features

2. Select an icon you want to add.
u You will see a plus mark on the upper
right hand corner of the selected icon.

Select

3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the
Configuration of Instrument Panel
screen.

OK
Continued

237

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Deleting contents

1Deleting contents

To delete contents on the driver information interface, first select:
1. Delete

Delete

Features

2. Select an icon you want to delete.
u The icon with an X on the upper right
hand corner can be deleted.

Select

3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the
Configuration of Instrument Panel
screen.

238

You can also delete contents by selecting:
1. Delete or Edit Order
2. Select and hold an icon you want to delete.
3. Drag and drop the icon to the trash icon.
4. Select OK.
uThe screen will return to the Configuration of
Instrument Panel screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Wallpaper Setup

1Wallpaper Setup

You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.

■ Import wallpaper
You can import up to five images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash
drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB
port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 205

Continued

Features

2. Select Settings.
3. Select Clock.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open
the Wallpaper tab.
5. Select Add New.
u The picture name is displayed on the list.
6. Select a desired picture.
u The preview is displayed on the left side
on the screen.
7. Select Start Import to save the data.
u The display will return to the wallpaper
list.

The wallpaper you set up on Clock/Wallpaper Type
cannot be displayed on the driver information
interface.
• When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive’s root directory.
Images in a folder cannot be imported.
• The file name must be fewer than 64 characters.
• The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
• The individual file size limit is 5 MB.
• The maximum image size is 4,096 × 4,096 pixels. If
the image size is less than 800 × 480 pixels, the
image is displayed in the middle of the screen with
the extra area appearing in black.
• If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.
After changing the screen interface design, you can
change the wallpaper by following procedure.
1. Select
.
2. Select and hold empty space on the home screen.
The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Change Wallpaper.
4. Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.

239

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Select wallpaper
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a desired wallpaper.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Set.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

1Wallpaper Setup
From the pop-up menu, select Preview to see a
preview at full-size screen.
12ᾉ34

■ To view wallpaper once it is set
Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Info.
3. Select
.
4. Select Clock/Wallpaper.

■ Delete wallpaper
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Clock.
3. Select Clock/Wallpaper Type, then open the Wallpaper tab.
u The screen changes to the wallpaper list.
4. Select a wallpaper that you want to delete.
u The preview is displayed on the left side on the screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
5. Select Delete.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
6. Select Yes to delete completely.
u The display will return to the wallpaper list.

240

12:34 AM
XX. XX. XXXX(XX.)

To go back to the previous screen, select OK, or
select
.
When the file size is large, it takes a while to be
previewed.
To delete all wallpapers you add, select Delete All,
then Yes.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Home Screen

1Home Screen
The home screen has 5 pages (fixed). You cannot add
any more pages.

■ To change to a next screen

Select
to go directly back to the first page of the
home screen from any page.
Swipe

Icon

Current page position

, or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

Continued

Features

Selecting

Icon

241

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To use apps or widgets

Features
App List Icon

1To use apps or widgets

1. Select
.
2. Select .
3. Select App List.
u The Apps screen appears.
4. Select the app or widget you want to use.

Select and hold a selected app or widget to add that
app’s or widget’s shortcut on the home screen.

Preinstall app list:
• App Installer: Allows you to install apps.
• Browser: Displays the web browser utilized
by smartphone and Wi-Fi connection.
• Calculator: Displays Calculator.
• Downloads: Displays the data
downloaded from the web browser and so
on.
• Gallery: Displays images.
• Search: Displays various retrieval screen.

If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all
the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 338

Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this
occurs, you need to reset the system.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 338

In case those apps still do not startup normally even
after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.
There is a possibility that a browser is shut down in
the situation of the use. In that situation, the screen
will return to before the browser startup.
You can delete user installed apps by the following
procedure.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Detail Information.
6. Select an app that you want to delete.
7. Select Delete.
Pre-installed apps cannot be deleted.

242

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

243 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To add app or widget icons on the home screen
App or widget icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Select
.
2. Select .
3. Select and hold empty space on the home
screen.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Add App or Add Widget.
u The App/Widget screen appears.

Features

Select and hold.

Continued

243

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

244 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Select and hold.

Features
Drag and drop.

244

5. Select and hold an app or widget icon you
want to add.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
6. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
7. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To move icons on the home screen
You can change location on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon to where you want
it to be.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
Select and hold.
screen.

1To move icons on the home screen
You can also move the Phone, Info, Audio,
Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone
Connection, App List, and Instrument Panel icons
in the same manner.

Features

Drag and drop.

* Not available on all models

Continued

245

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ To remove icons on the home screen
You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization
screen.
2. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove
to the trash icon.
u The icon is removed from the home
screen.
Select and hold.
3. Select OK.
u The screen will return to the home
screen.
Features
Drag and drop to
trash icon.

246

* Not available on all models

1To remove icons on the home screen
You cannot delete the Phone, Info, Audio,
Settings, Navigation *, HondaLink, Smartphone
Connection, App List, and Instrument Panel
icons.
Apps or widgets will not be deleted by deleting the
icon on the home screen.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

247 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Status Area

Swipe

1. Swipe the upper area of the screen.
u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details.
3. Select
or swipe up the bottom bar to
close the area.

Features

Status Area

Bar

Continued

247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Changing the Screen Interface
You can change the screen interface design.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Change Skin.
6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

Features

248

1Changing the Screen Interface
After changing the screen interface design, you can
change the wallpaper by following procedure.
1. Select
.
2. Select and hold empty space on the home screen.
The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Change Wallpaper.
4. Select Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.
If you change the screen interface, some of the
setting items will change.
2 Customized Features P. 308

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Menu Customize

1Menu Customize

You can change menu icons on the right side of Audio, Phone, and Info screen.
1. Select and hold menu icon.
Menu Icons

You can also use the method below to change menu
icon:
Select Settings System Home tab Menu icon
position

Select and hold

Menu Icon

2. Select
or
icon, then Audio, Phone,
or Info from Menu Customize.
3. Select and hold the menu icon you want to
change, then drag and drop the icon to the
bottom.

Features

To change

Drag and drop

To add

4. Select and hold the menu icon you want to
add, then drag and drop the icon to above.
5. Select OK.

Drag and drop

Continued

249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

■ Closing Apps
You can close specific apps running in the background on the system.
1. Select and hold
.
Task Manager
2. Select the Active tab.
Active Application
u If you select the Active/History tab, you
Active
Active/History
can close the apps that are currently
Gallery
Navigator
running and delete the app activity
Calculator
history simultaneously.
3.
Select
an app you want to close.
Clear ALL
4. Select Clear.
u The display will return to the app list.
Features

250

Task Manager

* Not available on all models

1Closing Apps
If you have a number of apps running in the
background and something goes wrong with the
audio system, some of those apps may not work
properly. If this happens, close all the apps and relaunch the app/apps that you want to use.
To close all apps on the system, select Clear All, then
Yes.
You cannot close the HondaLink® and Garmin * apps.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound
1. Select
.
2. Select Audio.
3. Select
.
4. Select Sound.

Select a tab from the following choices:
• BAS-MID-TRE: Bass, Middle, Treble
• FAD-BAL-SUBW *: Fader, Balance,
Subwoofer *
• SVC∙Neural *: Speed Volume
Compensation, DTS Neural SurroundTM*
Features

* Not available on all models

251

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup
You can change the brightness or color theme of the audio/information screen.

■ Changing the Screen Brightness
12ᾉ34

Features

■ Changing the Screen’s Color Theme
12ᾉ34

252

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Display Settings.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Display tab.
5. Select Background Color.
6. Select the setting you want.
7. Select OK.

1Changing the Screen Brightness
You can change the Contrast and Black Level
settings in the same manner.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

■ Selecting an Audio Source
Select the source icon.

1Selecting an Audio Source

Source Select Screen

If you startup preinstalled audio apps,
is
displayed on the screen.
These preinstalled apps cannot be displayed on the
source select screen.
You can startup those audio apps from
.
Pandora® is available only in the U.S..

Source List Icons

■ Limitations for Manual Operation

Features

Select the current source icon, then select an icon on the source list to switch the
audio source.

Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

253

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation

Features

254

Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation.
The voice control system uses the
(Talk) and
(hang-up/back) buttons on
the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

1Voice Control Operation

■ Voice Recognition

1Voice Recognition

To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system:
• Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using.
• Close the windows and moonroof *.
• Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling.
• Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words.
• Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

* Not available on all models

When you press the
button, a helpful prompt asks
what you would like to do. Press and release the
button again to bypass this prompt and give a
command.

The voice control system can only be used from the
driver’s seat because the microphone unit removes
noises from the front passenger’s side.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Voice Portal Screen

You can see the list of commands in Voice
Info on the Info menu screen. Select Info,
then select
.
The system only recognizes the commands
on the following pages, at certain screens.
Free form voice commands are not
recognized.

■ Audio*1

This can be only used when the phone is
connected. When the system recognizes the
Phone call command, the screen will
change to the voice recognition screen for
phone commands.
• Dial by number
• Call history
• Redial
• Call
• Call
• Call Police
• Call 911
Phone Call commands are not available if
using Apple CarPlay.

When the system recognizes the Audio
command, the screen will change to the
audio voice recognition screen.
• Audio On
• Audio Off
• Radio FM
• Radio AM
• Radio SXM *
• Pandora *
• iPod
• USB
• Other Sources
Pandora * cannot be used with Android
Auto.

■ Music Search

■ Navigation*1

This can be only used when the iPod or USB
device is connected.

The screen changes to the navigation
screen.

Features

When the
(Talk) button is pressed,
available voice commands appear on the
screen.
For a complete list of commands, say “Voice
Help” after the beep or select Voice Help.

■ Phone Call

2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

■ Climate Control*1
When the system recognizes the Climate
Control command, the screen will change
the dedicated screen to the climate control
voice recognition screen.
2 Climate Control Commands*1 P. 257

■ HondaLink
This can be only used when the phone is
connected.

■ Voice Setting
The screen changes to the Voice Recog tab
on the System settings screen.

*1: Models with navigation system

* Not available on all models

Continued

255

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

256 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ Voice Help
You can see a list of the available
commands on the screen.
• Useful Commands
• Phone Commands
• Audio Commands*1
• On Screen Commands
• Music Search Commands
• General Commands
• Climate Control Commands*1

Features

■ Useful Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
voice portal top screen.
• Call
• Call
• What time is it?
• What is today’s date?

■ Phone Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the phone.
• Call by Number
• Call by Name
• Call
• Call

* Not available on all models

• Pandora play

■ iPod Commands

The system accepts these commands on the
dedicated screen for the voice recognition
of the audio.

■ Radio FM Commands

■ USB Commands

iPod play
iPod play track <1-30>
Music Search
What album is this?
What am I listening to?

• Radio tune to <87.7-107.9> FM
• Radio tune to <87.7 -107.9> HD <1-8>
FM
• Radio FM preset <1-12>

•
•
•
•
•

■ Radio AM Commands
• Radio tune to <530-1710> AM
• Radio AM preset <1-6>

■ Bluetooth® Audio Commands

• SXM channel <1-255>

256

■ Pandora Commands *

•
•
•
•
•

■ Audio Commands*1

■ Radio SXM Commands *
*1: Models with navigation system

• SXM channel
• Radio SXM preset <1-12>

USB play
USB play track <1-30>
Music Search
What album is this?
What am I listening to?

• Bluetooth® Audio play
NOTE:
Bluetooth® Audio commands may not work
on some phones or Bluetooth® Audio
devices.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

257 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

■ On Screen Commands
When On Screen Commands is selected,
the explanation screen is displayed.

■ Music Search Commands
The system accepts these commands on the
Music Search screen.

■ Using Song By Voice

■ Song By Voice Commands
•
•
•
•
•
•

What am I listening to?
Who am I listening to?
Who is this?
What’s playing?
Who’s playing?
What album is this?

•
•
•
•
•
•

Play artist
Play track/song
Play album
Play genre/category
Play playlist
Play composer

■ List Commands
•
•
•
•
•

List artist
List album
List genre/category
List playlist
List composer

■ General Commands
• What time is it?
• What is today’s date?

■ Climate Control Commands*1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Climate Control on
Climate Control off
Fan Speed <1-7>
Temperature max heat
Temperature max cool
Temperature <57-87> degrees
Defrost on
Defrost off
Air conditioner on
Air conditioner off
More
Climate control automatic
Vent
Dash and floor
Fan speed up
Fan speed down
Floor vents
Floor and defrost
Temperature up
Temperature down

Features

Song By Voice is a feature that allows you
to select music from your iPod or USB device
using Voice Commands. To activate this
mode, you must push the talk switch and
say: “Music search”.
TM

■ Play Commands

*1: Models with navigation system

257

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

258 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Playing AM/FM Radio

Driver Information Interface

Audio/Information Screen
Features

/AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon
Select to turn the audio system
on and off.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(Menu) Icon
Select to display the menu items.

AUDIO

HOME

VOL

BACK

(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous display.
Scan Icon
Select to scan each station with a strong signal.
Tune Icons
Select
or

to tune the radio frequency.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

258

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
Seek Icons
Select
or
to search the
selected band up or down for a
station with a strong signal.
Preset Icons
Tune the preset radio frequency. Select and hold the
preset icon to store that station. Select to display
preset 7 onwards.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Preset Memory

1Preset Memory
The ST indicator appears on the display indicating
stereo FM broadcasts.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

To store a station:
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 207

You can also store a preset station by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.

You can store 6 AM stations and 12 FM stations into
preset memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license
from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD RadioTM and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corp.

Lists the strongest stations on the selected band.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.

Features

■ Station List

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.

Continued

259

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn
off scan, select Cancel or
.
Models with HD RadioTM

■ HD Subchannel

Features

Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to
an FM station.
1. Select
.
2. Select HD Subchannel.
3. Select the channel number.

■ Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.

■ To find an RDS station from Station List
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select the station.

■ Manual update
Updates your available station list at any time.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a list while listening to an FM station.
2. Select the Station List tab.
3. Select Refresh.

260

1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS
automatically turns on, and the frequency display
changes to the station name. However, when the
signals of that station become weak, the display
changes from the station name to the frequency.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

261 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

■ Radio text
Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.
1. Select
.
2. Select View Radio Text.
■ Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds.
To turn off scan, select Cancel or

Features

261

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

262 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

Playing SiriusXM® Radio *

Channel Icons
Select
or
to the previous
or next channel.
Select and hold to rapidly skip 10
channels at a time.

Driver Information Interface

Album Art

Audio/Information Screen
Features

/AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon
Press to turn the audio system on
and off.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(Menu) Icon
Select to display the menu items.

AUDIO

Station Art

HOME

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

VOL

BACK

(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous display.
Scan Icon
Select to scan each channel.
Category Icons
Select
or
to display and select a
SiriusXM® Radio category.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

262

* Not available on all models

Skip Icons
Select
or
to change
section in the channel.Select and
hold to move rapidly within the
section.

Preset Icons
Tune the preset radio station. Select
and hold the preset icon to store that
station. Select to display preset 7
onwards.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ To Change the Tune Mode

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio *
In the channel mode, all available channels are
selectable. In the category mode, you can select a
channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).

1. Select
.
2. Select Tune Mode.
3. Select Channel Mode or Category Mode.

There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does
not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title).
This does not indicate a problem with your audio
system.

Switching the Audio Mode
Press the 3 or 4 button on the steering wheel or
select SOURCE on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 207

Features

SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order,
which can take about a minute. Once they have
loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make
your selections.

Tune Start:
When you change to a preset channel, a song being
played on that channel restarts from the beginning
with this function. This can be turned on or off from
the Audio settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 308

* Not available on all models

Continued

263

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Preset Memory
To store a channel:
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Press and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
3. Select OK.
You can also store a channel by the following procedure.
1. Tune to the selected channel.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number for the station you want to store.
Features

■ Multi-channel preset (for music channels only)

264

* Not available on all models

You can store up to four of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station.
2. Select the open/close icon to display a list.
3. Select the Preset tab.
4. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel.
u A message appears if there are no
available presets.
5. Select Combine.

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio *
You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset
memory.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Listening to Featured Channels

1Listening to Featured Channels

Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected.
1. Select the open/close icon to display a channel list.
2. Select the Channel tab.
3. Select the featured channel list title you want to listen to.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed.
4. Select the channel.

Up to three featured channels by SiriusXM® can be
displayed.
Featured channel lists are at the top of the channel
list.

Features

Continued

265

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel’s
broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel’s broadcast, starting
from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the
system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You
can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.
1. Select
.
2. Select Playback.
3. Move the time marker to the position you want to replay.

Features

The following items are available on the pop-up screen:
(Skip Down): Skips to the previously stored channel. Select and hold to
fastrewind the current selection.
(Skip Up): Skips to the next channel. Select and hold to fast-forward the
current selection.
(15sec Back): Select to skip back 15 seconds in the current selection. Select and
hold to fast-rewind the current selection.
(15sec Skip): Select to skip forward 15 seconds in the current selection. Select
and hold to fast-forward the current selection.
u Select OK to close the pop-up menu. Replay in playback mode continues.
To play or pause on playback mode:
1. Select
.
2. Select Play/Pause.

1Replay Function
The system starts storing broadcast in memory when
the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to
the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the
power mode is turned off as it erases memory.
You can check how long the program has been
stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will
automatically start deleting the oldest data.
Audio/Information Screen
(A)
Genre AAA

(B)

(C)
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is
behind the real-time broadcast
(B): Replayed segment
(C): Length stored in memory
When you listen a multi-channel preset while at the
playback mode, the replayed segment is not
displayed.

266

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Returning to real-time broadcast
1. Select
.
2. Select Go to Live.

■ Live Sports Alert

1Live Sports Alert

While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from
the games of your favorite teams.

■ To set up a favorite team

The sports alert function is available in SiriusXM®
mode only.

1To set up a favorite team
Sports alerts cut in only when SiriusXM® mode is on.
Selecting On(one time) from the customize settings
disables the alert feature next time you turn the
power mode to ON.
2 Customized Features P. 308

Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Sports Flash Setup.
5. Select Favorite Team.
6. Select a team.

You can also set up a favorite team by the following
procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select
.
3. Select Setting.
4. Select Sports Flash Setup.

■ To set up an alert message
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Sports Flash Setup.
5. Select Interrupt.
6. Select On(one time) or On(continue).

Continued

267

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ To set up an alert beep
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Sports Flash Setup.
5. Select Interrupt Beep.
6. Select On.

■ Receiving a sports alert
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert.
2. Select Listen.
u You can use the same items as the playback mode pop-up screen.
Features

2 Replay Function P. 266

To go back to the previous screen, select Back.

■ Listening to a missed sports alert
If you have missed a sports alert:
1. Select
.
2. Select Sports Flash List.
3. Select alert.

268

1To set up an alert beep
You can also set up a alert beep by the following
procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select
.
3. Select Setting.
4. Select Sports Flash Setup.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio *

■ Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information.

■ To set up a traffic & weather information
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Audio.
4. Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
5. Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select Unregistered.

1Traffic and Weather Information
The traffic and weather information function at
SiriusXM® mode only.
You can also set up the traffic and weather
information by the following procedure.
1. Select Audio.
2. Select
.
3. Select Setting.
4. Select Traffic & Weather Setup.
Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.
Features

■ Listening a traffic and weather information
1. Select
.
2. Select Traffic & Weather.
u Play mode can also use the any items same as playback mode.
2 Replay Function P. 266

To go back to the previous screen, select OK.

■ Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds.
1. Select Scan.
2. Select Scan Channels.
u You can select the desired channel by songs using Scan Songs in Preset.
To turn off scan, select Cancel Scan.

1Scan
The “Scan Songs in Preset” function is based on
TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®.
The “Featured Channels” function is based on
Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®.
TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

269

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the iPod
mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 205

Driver Information Interface

Features
/AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon
Select to turn the audio system
on and off.
VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(Menu) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Cover Art

AUDIO

VOL

Open/Close Icon*1
Displays/hides the detailed
information.

BACK

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

270

Audio/Information Screen

HOME

Play/Pause Icon

Song Icons
Select
or
to change songs.
Select and hold to move rapidly
within a song.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Select

1Playing an iPod

and select Music Search.

Available operating functions vary on models or
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 299

Category
Selection

2. Select the items on that menu.

Select Switch USB Device in the Audio menu
screen to switch to another USB device.

Features

If you operate any music app on your iPhone/iPod
while the phone is connected to the audio system,
you may no longer be able to operate the same app
on the audio/information screen.
Reconnect the device if necessary.

If an iPhone is connected via Apple CarPlay, the iPod/
USB source is unavailable and audio files on the
phone can only be played within Apple CarPlay.

Item Selection

Continued

271

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file.
Select a play mode.

Features

272

■ To turn off a play mode
Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items
Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available files in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a
selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs,
podcasts, genres, composers, or audiobooks) in
random order.
Repeat Song: Repeats the current track.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Use SBV to search for and play music from your USB flash drive or iPod using voice
commands.

1Song By VoiceTM (SBV)
Setting options:

• On (factory default): Song By VoiceTM commands

■ To enable SBV

are available.

• Off: Disable the feature.

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.
5. Select Song by Voice.
6. Select On or Off.

Features

Continued

273

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Searching for music using SBV

1Searching for music using SBV

Features

1. Set the Song by Voice setting to On.
2. Press the
(Talk) button and say “Music
Search” to activate the SBV feature for the
USB flash drive and iPod.
3. Then, say a next command.
u Example 1: Say “(List) ‘Artist A’“ to view a
list of songs by that artist. Select the
desired song to start playing.
u Example 2: Say “Play ‘Artist A’“ to start
playing songs by that artist.
4. To cancel SBV, press the
(hang-up/
back) button on the steering wheel. The
selected song continues playing.
Once you have canceled this mode, you need
to press the
button and say “Music Search”
again to re-activate this mode.

274

Song By VoiceTM Commands List
2 Song By Voice Commands P. 257
NOTE:
Song By VoiceTM commands are available for tracks
stored on the USB flash drive or iPod.
You can add phonetic modifications of difficult
words so that it is easier for SBV to recognize artists,
songs, albums, and composers in voice commands.
2 Phonetic Modification P. 275
SBV is not available when using Apple CarPlay. Use
Siri Eyes Free instead.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

■ Phonetic Modification

1Phonetic Modification

Continued

Song by Voice Phonetic Modification is grayed
out when Song by Voice is set to Off.
You can store up to 2,000 phonetic modification
items.

Features

Add phonetic modifications of difficult or foreign words so that it is easier for SBV
to recognize artists, songs, albums, and composers in voice commands when
searching for music on the USB flash drive or iPod.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog. tab.
5. Select Song by Voice Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select New Modification.
7. Select USB or iPod.

275

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

276 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSong By VoiceTM (SBV)

Features

276

8. Select the item to modify (e.g., Artist).
u The list of the selected item appears on
the screen.
9. Select an entry to modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
u The listen to the current phonetic
modification, select Play.
u To delete the current phonetic
modification, select Delete.
10. Select Modify.
11. Select the phonetic spelling you want to
use (e.g., ”Artist A”) when prompted.
12. Select OK.
u The artist “No Name” is phonetically
modified to “Artist A.” When in the SBV
mode, you can press the
(Talk)
button and use the voice command
“Play ‘Artist A’” to play songs by the
artist “No Name.”

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® *

U.S. models

Playing Pandora® *

1Playing Pandora® *

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from the Pandora® app on a
compatible smartphone.
This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle’s
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system, or with an iPhone, you can connect using
your USB cable to the USB port.
2 Phone Setup P. 370
2 USB Port(s) P. 205

To find out if your phone is compatible with this
feature, visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.

/AUDIO (Power/
Audio) Icon
Select to turn the audio
system on and off.

Cover Art
Audio/Information
Screen
AUDIO

HOME

(Menu) Icon
Select to display the
menu items.

VOL

Station Up/Down Icons
Select to change a station.

Like/Dislike Icons
Select to evaluate a song.
Play/Pause Icon
Select to resume or play a song.

If your phone is connected to Android Auto, Pandora
is only available through the Android Auto interface.
Visit the Android Auto website to check
compatibility.

Skip Icon
Select to skip a song.

*1:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
* Not available on all models

Pandora® is free, personalized radio that plays music
and comedy you’ll love. Just start with the name of
one of your favorite artists, songs, comedians or
composers and Pandora® will create a custom station
that plays similar tracks. Pandora® also features
hundreds of genre stations ranging from Dubstep to
Smooth Jazz to Power Workout.
If you cannot operate Pandora® through the audio
system, it may be streaming through Bluetooth®
Audio. Make sure Pandora® mode on your audio
system is selected.

BACK

(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the
previous display.

To use this service in your vehicle, the Pandora® app
must first be installed on your phone. Visit
www.pandora.com for more information.

Features

Driver Information
Interface

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the
volume.

Pandora®, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade
dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission. Pandora
is only available in certain countries. Visit the Pandora
website for more information.

Continued

277

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Pandora® *

■ Pandora® Menu

1Pandora® Menu

You can operate some of the Pandora® menu items from your vehicle’s audio
system. The available items are:
• Bookmark
• Station List
• New Station
• Sound
• Setting

■ Operating a menu item
Features

1. Select
.
2. Select an item.

278

* Not available on all models

Available operating functions vary on software
versions. Some functions may not be available on the
vehicle’s audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 Pandora® * P. 300
Pandora® may limit the total number of skips allowed
on the service. If you dislike a track after the skip limit
has been reached, your feedback will be saved but
the current track will continue to play.
To change stations, activate the Pandora® menu,
select Station List, and then select a new station. It
also changes stations on the main Pandora® screen.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3,
WMA, or AAC*1 format.
Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 205

Driver Information Interface

Features

/AUDIO (Power/Audio) Icon
Select to turn the audio system on
and off.

AUDIO

HOME

VOL (Volume) Icons
Select to adjust the volume.
(Menu) Icon
Select to display the menu items.
(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the previous
display.
Folder Icons
Select
to skip to the next folder, and

Audio/Information Screen

VOL

BACK

to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

Open/Close Icon*2
Displays/hides the detailed
information.
Track Icons
Select
or
to change files.
Select and hold to move rapidly within
a track.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit.
*2:Some or all of the lists may not be displayed.
Continued

279

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Select

and select Music Search.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive
Use the recommended USB flash drives.
2 General Information on the Audio System
P. 302
WMA files protected by digital rights management
(DRM) cannot be played.
The audio system displays Unplayable File, then
skips to the next file.

2. Select Music.
Features
Folder Selection

3. Select a folder.

Track Selection

4. Select a track.

280

If there is a problem, you may see an error message
on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 299

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

■ How to Select a Play Mode
You can select scan, repeat, and random modes when playing a file.
■ Scan
1. Select
.
2. Select Scan.
3. Select a play mode.

Play Mode Menu Items
Scan
Scan Folders: Provides 10-second sampling of the
first file in each of the main folders.
Scan Tracks: Provides 10-second sampling of all files
in the current folder.
Random/Repeat
Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current
folder in random order.
Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order.
Repeat Folder: Repeats all files in the current folder.
Repeat Track: Repeats the current file.

Features

■ Random/Repeat
Select a play mode.

1How to Select a Play Mode

■ To turn off a play mode
To turn off Scan, select
or Cancel.
To turn off Random/Repeat, select the mode again.

281

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming
audio capabilities are compatible.
To check if your phone is compatible, visit
http://www.handsfreelink.com/Honda/.
It may be illegal to perform some data device
functions while driving.

Features

Driver Information
Interface
/AUDIO (Power/
Audio) Icon
Select to turn the
audio system on and
off.

Audio/
Information
Screen
Bluetooth
Indicator
Appears when
your phone is
connected to
HFL.

AUDIO

VOL (Volume)
Icons
Select to adjust
the volume.
(Menu) Icon
Select to display
the menu items.

HOME

VOL

Pause Icon

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system,
there may be a delay before the system begins to
play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track
may not appear correctly.

Track Icons
Select
or
to change tracks.
Group Icons
Select
or
to change group.

If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is
unavailable. However, a second previously paired
phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting
Connect
from the Bluetooth Device List.
2 Phone Setup P. 370

*1:Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not
be displayed.

282

The connected phone for Bluetooth® Audio can be
different.

Open/Close
Icon*1
Displays/hides
the detailed
information.

BACK

(Back) Icon
Select to go back to the
previous display.
Play Icon

Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time.
When there are more than two paired phones in the
vehicle, the first paired phone the system finds is
automatically connected.

Some functions may not be available on some
devices.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

■ To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and
connected to the system.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
To play the audio files, you may need to operate your
phone. If so, follow the phone maker’s operating
instructions.

2 Phone Setup P. 370

2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible
for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be
connected.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing
from your phone.
You can change the connected phone in the
Bluetooth® settings on the Audio menu screen by
the following procedure.
1. Select
.
2. Select Setting.

■ Searching for Music

1Searching for Music

1. Select
.
2. Select Music Search.
3. Select a search category (e.g., Albums).
4. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

Features

■ To pause or resume a file
Select the play icon or pause icon.

Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect,
some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

283

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect
your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 289
2 Phone Setup P. 370

■ HondaLink® Menu

1HondaLink®
The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most
iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
When Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected to
the audio system, HondaLink® can be accessed even
without a Wi-Fi connection.

Features

■ Places *
Displays restaurants, gas stations, Honda dealer, and so on. You can also navigate to
the found locations via the navigation.

■ Vehicle
Displays instruction messages when the vehicle needs service.

■ Help & Support
Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service
center.

284

* Not available on all models

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

285 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ Messages from Honda
Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
■ Weather *
Displays a weekly five-day weather forecast for any location you want. You can
change the ZIP Code at any time.

■ To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.

■ To enable the HondaLink® service
Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Info.
4. Select the HondaLink tab.
5. Select Diagnostics & Location Data.
6. Select On.
You need to allow the consent of the location
service to enable the HondaLink® service.
Enable once: Allows only one time. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.

* Not available on all models

Continued

285

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

286 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ To link with HondaLink®
You can see the Connection Guide screen
after launching HondaLink®. If you do not
need this guide, select check-box and select
OK.

Features

286

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

287 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

■ Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation.
1. A message appears and notifies you of a
new message on the header area.
u When the message is received, a
notification ring can be heard.

2. A message icon is continuously displayed in
the header area until the new message is
read.

Continued

Features

Message
Icon

287

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

288 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

3. From the top of the screen, swipe down to
see the messages.

4. Select a new message to open.
Features

288

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi and browse websites
or use online services on the audio/information screen. If your phone has wireless
hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following
steps to setup.

■ Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

BBBBB
CCCCC
DDDDD
EEEEE

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Wi-Fi tab.
5. Select Wi-Fi On/Off Status, then On.
6. Select Wi-Fi Device List.
u Make sure your phone’s Wi-Fi setting is
in access point (tethering) mode.
u Select the phone you want to connect to
the system.
u If you do not find the phone you want to
connect in the list, select Scan.
7. Select Connect.
u If needed, enter a password for your
phone and select OK.
u When the connection is successful, the
icon is displayed on the top of the
screen.
8. Select
to go back to the home screen.

Continued

You cannot go through the setting procedure while a
vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to setup the
Wi-Fi connection.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and
smartphone data use. Check your phone’s data
subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone
has Wi-Fi connectivity.

Features

12ᾉ34
AAAAA

1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)

You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or
off with the
icon on Wi-Fi Device List. Network
speed will not be displayed on this screen.

289

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

■ Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

Features

290

1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
iPhone users

You may need to go through an initial setup for WiFi connection again after you boot your phone.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free

Siri Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the
(Talk) button on the steering wheel when your
iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.

1Siri Eyes Free
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.

2 Phone Setup P. 370
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for
Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri
Eyes Free mode while operating a vehicle.

■ Using Siri Eyes Free

1Using Siri Eyes Free
Some commands work only on specific phone
features or apps.
Features

(Hang-up/back) Button
Press to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.

Appears
when Siri is
activated in
Siri Eyes Free
While in Siri Eyes Free:
The display remains the same.
No feedback or commands
appear.
(Talk) Button
Press and hold until the display
changes as shown.

291

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB,
you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a
phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.

1Apple CarPlay
Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later
are compatible with Apple CarPlay.

2 USB Port(s) P. 205
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to
Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible
apps.

■ Apple CarPlay Menu
Home screen

Apple CarPlay menu screen

Features

Apple CarPlay icon

Go back to the
home screen
Go back to the Apple
CarPlay menu screen

■ Phone
Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.

■ Messages
Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.

■ Music
Play music stored on your iPhone.

292

To use Apple CarPlay, connect the USB cable to the
front USB port. The USB port located in the center
console storage will not enable Apple CarPlay
operation.
2 USB Port(s) P. 205
To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function,
select Phone on the home screen. While connected
to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple
CarPlay. If you want to make a call with
HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the
USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 293
When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is
not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other
previously paired phones can stream audio via
Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 370
For details on countries and regions where Apple
CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining
to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

■ Maps
Display Apple CarPlay map and use the navigation function just as you would on
your iPhone.
Models with navigation system

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.

After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB, use the
following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the
transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed,
and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need
to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.

■ Enabling Apple CarPlay
Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Smartphone settings menu.
Continued

Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an
active cellular connection and data plan. Your
carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Apple
CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple
homepage for information on compatible apps.

Features

■ Setting Up Apple CarPlay

1Apple CarPlay

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
You can also use the method below to set up Apple
CarPlay:
Select HOME Settings Smartphone Apple
CarPlay
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is
governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and
Apple’s Privacy Policy.

293

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

■ Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri Eyes Free.

1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Eyes Free
Below are examples of questions and commands for
Siri Eyes Free.

• What movies are playing today?
• Call dad at work.
• What song is this?
• How’s the weather tomorrow?
• Read my latest email.
• Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit
www.apple.com/ios/siri.
Features

294

(Talk) button:
Press and hold to activate Siri Eyes Free.
Press again to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Android Auto
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the front USB,
Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can
use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation),
Google Play Music, and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a
tutorial will appear on the screen.
We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using
Android Auto.
2 USB Port(s) P. 205
2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 297

1Android Auto
To use Android Auto, you need to download the
Android Auto app from Google Play to your
smartphone.
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are
compatible with Android Auto.
Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used with Android Auto
phone.
Park in a safe place before connecting your Android
phone to Android Auto and when launching any
compatible apps.
Features

To use Android Auto, connect the USB cable to the
front USB port. The USB port in the center console
storage will not enable Android Auto operation.
2 USB Port(s) P. 205
When your Android phone is connected to Android
Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
However, other previously paired phones can stream
audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is
connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 370

Continued

295

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

■ Android Auto Menu

1Android Auto
6

: Go back to
the home screen
Android Auto icon
Features

a Maps (Navigation)
Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your
Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard
entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other
inputs.
Models with navigation system

Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Android Auto) can give
directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior
destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are
currently using will direct you to your destination.
The audio/information screen shows you turn-by-turn driving directions to your
destination.
b Phone (Communication)
Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
c Google Now (Home screen)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear
just when they’re needed.

296

For details on countries and regions where Android
Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to
function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Android Auto Operating Requirements &
Limitations
Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone
with an active cellular connection and data plan.
Your carrier’s rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software,
and other technology integral to providing Android
Auto functionality, as well as new or revised
governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or
cessation of Android Auto functionality and services.
Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or
guarantee of future Android Auto performance or
functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are
compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android
Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

d Music and audio
Play Google Play Music and music apps that are compatible with Android Auto.
To switch between music apps, press this icon.
e Go back to the Home Screen.
f Voice
Operate Android Auto with your voice.

■ Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the front USB, Android Auto is
automatically initiated.
1Enabling Android Auto

Enable Once: Allows only once. (Prompt
shows again next time.)
Always Enable: Allows anytime. (Prompt
does not show again.)
Cancel: Does not allow this consent.
You may change the consent settings under
the Smartphone settings menu.

Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely
parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone,
you will need to set up your phone so that auto
pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual
that came with your phone.

Features

■ Enabling Android Auto

You can use the method below to change Android
Auto settings after you have completed the initial
setup:
Select HOME Settings Smartphone Android
Auto
Use of user and vehicle information
The use and handling of user and vehicle information
transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is
governed by Google’s Privacy Policy.

Continued

297

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

■ Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the talk button to operate Android Auto with your voice.

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with
voice recognition:
• Reply to text.
• Call my wife.
• Navigate to Honda.
• Play my music.
• Send a text message to my wife.
• Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android
Auto homepage.

Features

You can also activate the voice recognition function
by pressing the
icon in the upper-right corner of
the screen.
(Talk) button:
Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice.
Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.
(Hang-up/back) button:
Press to deactivate voice recognition.

298

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

299 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Audio Error Messages
iPod/USB Flash Drive
If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

Solution
Appears when there is a problem with the audio system. Check if the device is
compatible with the audio system.

Bad USB Device
Please Check Owners Manual*1
The connected USB device has a problem.
See Owner’s Manual*2

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then turn
the audio system off, and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the
error.

Unsupported Ver*1
Unsupported Version*2

Appears when an unsupported iPod is connected. If it appears when a supported iPod
is connected, update the iPod software to the newer version.

Retry Connection*1
Connect Retry*2

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File*1, *2

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported
format. This error message appears for about three seconds, then plays the next song.

Features

USB Error*1, *2

iPod

Appears when the iPod is empty.
USB No Song*1
iPod No Song*1
No Data*2

USB flash drive

Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, or AAC files in
the USB flash drive.
iPod and USB flash drive

Check that compatible files are stored on the device.
Unsupported*1, *2

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported
device is connected, reconnect the device.

*1:Models with color audio system
*2:Models with Display Audio

299

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

300 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAudio Error MessagesuPandora® *

Pandora® *
If an error occurs while playing Pandora®, you may see the following error messages.
If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message

Solution

To begin listening, select a station from the Stations list.

Appears when there is no station list on the device. Use the device
to create a station.

Unable to rate track. Please try again.
Skip limit reached.

Appears when you try to skip a song or select Like/Dislike over
the predetermined number of times in an hour.

Unable to play Pandora. Please try again later.
Unable to retrieve a track explanation. Please try again later. Appears when the commanded operation fails. Try again later.
Unable to create bookmark. Please try again later.
Features

300

No Data

Appears when no data is available with Pandora® activated.
Reboot the app and reconnect the device.

Pandora App version is not supported

Appears when Pandora® version is not supported. Update
Pandora® to the latest version.

Unable to complete the operation. Please try again later.

Appears when the Pandora® server is in maintenance. Try again
later.

Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your
mobile phone

Appears when Pandora® is unable to play music. Check your
device.

Unable to connect Pandora. When stopped, check your
mobile phone

Appears when Pandora® app is not installed on your device. Install
Pandora® app to your device.

* Not available on all models

uuAudio Error MessagesuAndroid/Apps

Models with Display Audio

Android/Apps
If an error occurs while using the audio system or apps, you may see the following
error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.
Error Message*1
Unfortunately, **** has
stopped.

Solution
Error has occurred within app, select OK on the screen to close the app.

App is not responding.
Select Wait if you can wait for a response from app a little longer. If it does not respond even if you keep
**** is not responding.
waiting, select OK to close the app and start it up. If the error message continues, perform Factory Data
Would you like to close it?
Reset.
*1:****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon where an error
occurs.

Features

2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 338

301

General Information on the Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio Service *
■ Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on
the screen, select Channel 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call SiriusXM® or visit the SiriusXM® website
to subscribe.

■ Receiving SiriusXM® Radio

Features

Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the SOURCE button on the steering wheel,
or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30
minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with
good reception.

■ SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Channel Not Subscribed:
You are not subscribed to the channel selected.
Subscription Update:
SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network.
Channel Not Available:
No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable.
No Signal:
The signal is too weak in the current location.
Antenna Disconnected:
The SiriusXM® antenna is disconnected. Contact a dealer.

302

* Not available on all models

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
• U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com or 1800-852-9696
• Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca, or
1-877-209-0079
1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator;
therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause
satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are
more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you travel from the
equator.
You may experience reception problems under the
following circumstances:
• In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
• In tunnels
• On the lower level of a multi-tiered road
• Large items carried on the roof rack

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives
■ iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Model
iPod (5th generation)
iPod classic 80GB/160GB (launch in 2007)
iPod classic 120GB (launch in 2008)
iPod classic 160GB (launch in 2009)
iPod nano (1st to 7th generation) released between 2005 and 2012
iPod touch (1st to 5th generation) released between 2007 and 2012
iPhone 3G/iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4S/iPhone 5/iPhone 5c*1/iPhone 5s*1/
iPhone 6*1/iPhone 6 Plus*1

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
This system may not work with all software versions
of these devices.

■ USB Flash Drives
•
•
•
•
•

A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended.
Some digital audio players may not be compatible.
Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work.
Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display.
Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC formats may be unsupported.

1USB Flash Drives

Features

*1:Models with Display Audio

Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored
order. This order may be different from the order
displayed on your PC or device.

303

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

304 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

Models with Display Audio

Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
■ OWNER’S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE
APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE
SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER
LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND
VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS
ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR
DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY.
Features

304

USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN
THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE
DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED,
STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS’ OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING,
FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS
SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE
POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE’S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE’S USE AND HANDLING OF
DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

305 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto

■ DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY

Features

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO (“THE APPLICATIONS”) IS AT YOUR
SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE,” WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED
TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR
AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST
AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE
PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE,
SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC.,
SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY
TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY
(CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND
JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA’S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED
BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.

305

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses

About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.

LICENCE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor
Standard Systems Inc.

Models with color audio system

1. Press the MENU/CLOCK button.
2. Rotate
to select Settings, then press .
3. Rotate
to select OSS Licenses, then press
Models with Display Audio

Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Detail Info.
6. Select About device.
7. Select Legal information.
8. Select Open source licenses.

1About Open Source Licenses

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the “Software”), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

306

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information

License Information
■ DOLBY DIGITAL
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Features

■ DTS
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered
trademarks, and DTS Digital Surround and Neural Surround are trademarks of DTS,
Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

307

Customized Features
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.

When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.

Models with color audio system

■ How to customize

Continuously variable transmission models

While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w , press the
MENU/CLOCK button, then select Settings. To customize the phone settings,
press the
button, then select Phone Setup.
Audio/Information Screen

• Shift to (P .
Manual transmission models

• Set the parking brake.
1How to customize

(Phone) Button

Features

These indications are used to show how to operate
the selector knob.
Rotate
to select.
Press
to enter.
To customize other features, select Settings, rotate
, then press
.
2 List of customizable options P. 312

MENU/CLOCK Button

Selector Knob

308

1Customized Features

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

309 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ Customization Flow
Press the MENU/CLOCK button.

Clock Adjustment

Settings

Bluetooth

Add New Device
Connect an Audio Device

Display Adjustment

Brightness
Features

Contrast
Black Level

Rear Camera

Camera Guideline

Continued

309

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

310 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Display Change

Audio
Wallpaper

Wallpaper

Select
Import
Delete

Features

Color Theme

Blue
Red
Amber
Gray

Language

Clock Format

12h
24h

OSS Licenses

310

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

311 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Press the

button and rotate

to select Phone Setup, then press

Bluetooth Setup

.
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Connect an Audio Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key

Ringtone

Features

Speed Dial

Fixed
Mobile Phone

Caller ID Info

Name Priority
Number Priority

System Clear

Continued

311

uuCustomized Featuresu

■ List of customizable options
Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Add New Device

Features

Brightness
Display
Contrast
Adjustment
Black Level

312

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits and deletes a
paired phone, and create a code for a paired
phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 345

Connect an Audio
Device

*1:Default Setting

—

2 Clock P. 128

Bluetooth

Rear
Camera

Selectable Settings

Adjust Clock.

Clock Adjustment

Settings

Description

Camera Guideline

Connects, disconnects or pairs a Bluetooth®
Audio device to HFL.
Changes the brightness of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the contrast of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the black level of the audio/
information screen.
Selects whether the guidelines come on the
audio/information screen.

—
—
—
—
On*1/Off

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Display Change
Select
Wallpaper

Import
Delete

Settings
Color Theme
Language

OSS Licenses

Changes the display type.
Changes the wallpaper type.

Selectable Settings
Audio*1/Wallpaper
Clock*1/Image1/Image2/
Image3

Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.

—

2 Wallpaper Setup P. 214

Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.
Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.
Changes the display language.
Selects the digital clock display from 12H to
24H.
Shows the legal information.

Image1 /Image2/Image3
*1

Blue*1/Red/Amber/Gray
English*1/French/Spanish
12H*1/24H

Features

Clock Format

Description

—

*1:Default Setting

Continued

313

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Add New Device
Connect a Phone
Bluetooth
Setup

Phone
Setup
Features

Speed Dial
Ringtone
Caller ID Info
System Clear
*1:Default Setting

314

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 345

Pairs a new phone or connects a paired phone
to HFL.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 345

Connect an Audio
Device
Disconnect All Devices
Delete Device
Pass-Key

Connects a Bluetooth® Audio device to HFL.

—

Disconnects a paired phone from HFL.
Deletes a paired phone.
Inputs and changes a code for a paired phone.
Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

—
—
—
—

2 Speed Dial P. 352

Selects the ring tone.
Fixed /Mobile Phone
Prioritizes the caller’s name or phone number Name Priority*1/Number
as the caller ID.
Priority
Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
—
Phone Setup group as default.
*1

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with Display Audio

1Customized Features

■ How to customize
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the ignition switch in ON (w *1, select
, and Settings, then select a setting item.

When you customize settings:
• Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop.
Continuously variable transmission models

• Shift to (P .
Manual transmission models

• Set the parking brake.
To customize other features, select Settings.
2 List of customizable options P. 323

Features

Audio/Information Screen

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

315

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

316 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with Display Audio

■ Customization flow
Select Settings.

Clock

Features

HondaLink
Others
Info

Clock

HondaLink
Others
*1 : Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*2 : Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

316

* Not available on all models

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/Clock Type*2
Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone *
Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Clock Format
Clock Display
Overlay Clock Location
Clock Reset
Diagnostic & Location Data
Info Screen Preference

Clock
Wallpaper

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

317 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Camera

Rear Camera
LaneWatch *

Bluetooth/Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

Wi-Fi

Phone

Apple CarPlay
Android Auto
Phone

Text/Email

Audio

* Not available on all models

Bluetooth On/Off Status
Bluetooth Device List
Edit Pairing Code
Wi-Fi On/Off Status
Wi-Fi Device List
Wi-Fi Information
Features

Smartphone

Fixed Guideline
Dynamic Guideline
Show with Turn Signal
Display Time after Turn Signal Off
Reference Line

FM/AM

Bluetooth Device List
Edit Speed Dial
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist
Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification
HD Radio Mode (FM) *
HD Radio Mode (AM) *
RDS INFO

Continued

317

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

318 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

SXM *

Tune Start
Sports Flash Setup
Traffic & Weather Setup
Multiple Channel Mix Preset

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Device List

Video
Other

Cover Art
Audio Source Pop-Up

Default
Features

System

Home

Display

*1 : Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*2 : Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

318

* Not available on all models

Home Screen Edit Order
Menu icon position*2
Configuration of Instrument Panel
Tachometer Setting
Display Settings
Brightness
Contrast
Black Level
Background Color*1
Blue
Amber
Red
Violet
BlueGreen
Touch Panel Sensitivity

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

319 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Guidance Volume *
Text Message Volume
Voice Recog. Volume
Meter Volume - List Reading
Meter Volume - Alphabetic Reading
Verbal Reminder
Beep Volume

Voice Recog.

One Press Voice Operation
Voice Prompt
Voice Recog. Volume
Song by Voice
Song by Voice Phonetic Modification
Phonebook Phonetic Modification
Automatic Phone Sync

Features

* Not available on all models

Sound/Beep

Continued

319

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

320 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Clock

Clock
Wallpaper

Features

Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone *
Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Clock Format
Clock Display
Overlay Clock Location
Clock Reset
Others

*1 : Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*2 : Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

320

Clock/Wallpaper Type*1/
Clock Type*2

* Not available on all models

Language
Voice Command Tips
Remember Last Screen*1
Memory Refresh
Refresh Time Adjustment
Swipe Direction
4way Switch Gesture
Volume Gestures
Change Skin
Factory Data Reset
Climate screen timeout
Detail Information

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

321 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Vehicle

TPMS Calibration *
Driver Assist System Setup *

Meter Setup

Continued

Features

* Not available on all models

Cancel
Calibrate
Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting
Adjust Outside Temp. Display
“Trip A” Reset Timing
“Trip B” Reset Timing
Adjust Alarm Volume
Fuel Efficiency Backlight
Turn By Turn Auto Display
New Message Notifications
Speed/Distance Units
Tachometer

321

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

322 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

Keyless Access Setup *

Remote Start System ON/OFF *
Door Unlock Mode
Keyless Access Light Flash
Keyless Access Beep

Lighting Setup

Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto Off Timer
Auto Light Sensitivity
Auto Interior Illumination Sensitivity
Auto Headlight ON With Wiper ON

Door/Window Setup

Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode
Keyless Lock Answer Back
Security Relock Timer
Walk Away Auto Lock *

Maintenance Info.

322

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Models with Display Audio

■ List of customizable options
Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type*1/
Clock
Type*2

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Features

Auto Time Zone *
Clock
Clock

Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight Saving Time

See Info on P. 324

Clock Format
Clock Display
Overlay Clock Location
Clock Reset
HondaLink

Diagnostic & Location Data

Others

Info Screen Preference

*1:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.
* Not available on all models

Continued

323

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

324 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type*2/
Clock
Type*3

Features

324

Info

Clock

Description
Changes the clock display type.
●

Wallpaper

●
●

Changes the wallpaper type.
Imports an image file for a new wallpaper.
Deletes an image file for a wallpaper.

Selectable Settings
Analog/Digital*1/
Small Digital/Off
Blank/Galaxy*1/
Metallic/Time Zone

Clock Adjustment

Adjusts Clock.

—

Auto Time Zone *

Automatically adjusts the clock when driving
through different time zones.

Manual Time Zone *

Changes the time zone manually.

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Select On to have the GPS automatically adjust
the clock to daylight savings time. Select Off to
cancel this function.

On*1/Off

Clock Format

Selects the digital clock display from 12H to 24H.

12H*1/24H

Clock Display

Selects whether the clock display comes on.

On*1/Off

Overlay Clock Location

Changes the clock display layout.

Upper Right*1/Upper
Left/Lower Right/
Lower Left/Off

Clock Reset

Resets the clock settings to the factory default.

Yes/No

On*1/Off
—

Clock

*1:Default Setting
*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.
* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
HondaLink

Selectable Settings

Diagnostic & Location
Data

Turns HondaLink® on and off.

On*1/Off

Info Screen Preference

Selects the top menu when the
button is
pressed.
● Info Top- A brief menu pops up.
● Info Menu- A full menu pops up.
● Off- A menu does not pop up.

Info Top/Info
Menu*1/Off

Info
Others

Description

Selects whether the fixed guidelines come on the
rear camera monitor.

On*1/Off

Features

Fixed Guideline

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 474

Rear
Camera

Dynamic Guideline

Selects whether the guidelines adjust to the
movement of the steering wheel.

On*1/Off

2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 474

Camera

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Rear
Camera setting group as default.

Yes/No

Show with Turn Signal

Selects whether the LaneWatch display comes on
when you move the turn signal lever to indicate a
right turn.

On*1/Off

Display Time after Turn
Signal Off

Changes the length of time the LaneWatch
display stays on after the turn signal lever returns
to the center.

0 second*1/2 seconds

LaneWatch *

*1:Default Setting
* Not available on all models

Continued

325

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Camera

Customizable Features

LaneWatch

Reference Line

Selects whether the reference lines come on the
LaneWatch monitor.

On*1/Off

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
LaneWatch group as default.

Yes/No

Bluetooth On/Off Status

Changes the Bluetooth® status.

On*1/Off

Bluetooth Device List

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone.

Features

Wi-Fi

—

2 Phone Setup P. 370

Edit Pairing Code
Bluetooth
/Wi-Fi

Edits a pairing code.
2 To change the pairing code setting P. 371

Random/Fixed*1

Wi-Fi On/Off Status

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

On/Off*1

Wi-Fi Device List

Connects, disconnects, or deletes the Wi-Fi
device.

—

Wi-Fi Information

Shows the Wi-Fi information of the head unit.

—

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
Bluetooth/Wi-Fi group as default.

Apple CarPlay

Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection.

—

Android Auto

Sets up the Android Auto connection.

—

*1:Default Setting

326

Selectable Settings

Bluetooth

Smartphone

Description

* Not available on all models

Yes/No

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Bluetooth Device List

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, connects or
disconnects a paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 370

Edit Speed Dial
Phone

Selects the ring tone.

Fixed/Mobile
Phone*1

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets phonebook and call history data to be
automatically imported when a phone is paired
to HFL.

On*1/Off

HondaLink Assist

Turns HondaLink Assist on and off.

On/Off*1

Enable Text/Email

Turns the text/e-mail message function on and
off.

On*1/Off

Select Account

Selects a text or e-mail message account.

New Message Notification

Selects whether a pop-up alert comes on the
screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.

On/Off

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Phone
settings group as default.

Yes/No

Features

Default

—

2 Speed Dial P. 376

Ring Tone

Phone

Text/Email

Edits, adds or deletes a speed dial entry.

—

*1:Default Setting

Continued

327

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

FM/AM mode

Selects whether the audio system automatically
switches to the digital radio waves or receives the
analog waves only.

Auto*1/Analog

RDS INFO

Turns on and off the RDS information.

On*1/Off

Tune Start

Turns on and off, starts the song from the
beginning as you change preset stations.

On*1/Off

Turns on and off the sports alert function.

Off/On(one time)/
On(continue)*1

Features

Interrupt

SiriusXM® mode

SXM *

*1:Default Setting

328

* Not available on all models

Selectable Settings

HD Radio Mode *

FM/AM

Audio

Description

Sports
Flash
Setup

Favorite Team
Interrupt Beep

Selects your favorite sports teams.

—

2 Live Sports Alert P. 267

Causes the system to beep when the sports alert
is notified.

Traffic & Weather Setup

Selects the region you want to receive the
information.

Multiple Channel Mix
Preset

Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off.

On*1/Off
—
On/Off*1

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Bluetooth® mode

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Device List

Description

Selectable Settings

Pairs a new phone to HFL, edits or deletes a
paired phone.

—

2 Phone Setup P. 370
iPod or USB mode

Audio

Other

[Your selected media]
Cover Art
Audio Source Pop-Up

System

On*1/Off

Selects whether the list of selectable audio
sources comes on when Audio is selected on the
home screen.

On/Off*1

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the Audio
settings group as default.

Yes/No

Features

Default

Turns the cover art display on and off.

Home Screen Edit Order

Changes the HOME screen icon layout.

—

Menu icon position*2

Changes the position of the menu icons on the
Audio, Phone, and Info screen.

—

Configuration of
Instrument Panel

Changes the Instrument Panel screen icon
layout.

—

Tachometer Setting

Turns on and off the tachometer display.

Home

On*1/Off

*1:Default Setting
*2:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

Continued

329

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

330 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Display
Settings
Display

Features

System

Description

Selectable Settings

Brightness

Changes the brightness of the audio/information
screen.

—

Contrast

Changes the contrast of the audio/information
screen.

—

Black Level

Changes the black level of the audio/information
screen.

—

Background Color*2

Changes the background color of the audio/
information screen.

Blue/Amber/Red/
Violet/BlueGreen*1

Touch Panel Sensitivity

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Low*1

Guidance Volume *

Changes the sound volume.
Adjusts the guidance volume of the navigation
system.

1~6*1~11

Text Message Volume

Changes the text/e-mail message reading
volume.

1~6*1~11

Sound/
Beep

*1:Default Setting
*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.

330

* Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Sound
/Beep

Voice
Recog.

Selectable Settings

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

1~6*1~11

Meter Volume - List
Reading

Changes the list reading volume.

1~6*1~11

Meter Volume Alphabetic Reading

Changes the alphabetic reading volume.

1~6*1~11

Verbal Reminder

Turns the verbal reminders on and off.

On*1/Off

Beep Volume

Changes the beep volume.

Off/1/2*1/3

One Press Voice
Operation

Changes the setting of the
using the voice operation.

Voice Prompt

Turns the voice prompt on and off.

On*1/Off

Voice Recog. Volume

Changes the volume of the voice prompt.

1~6*1~11

Song by Voice

Turns the Song By VoiceTM on and off.

On*1/Off

Song by Voice
Phonetic Modification

Modifies a voice command for music stored in the system or
an iPod/iPhone.

Phonebook Phonetic
Modification

Modifies a voice command for the phonebook.

Automatic Phone Sync

Sets phonebook and call history data to be automatically
imported when a phone is paired to HFL.

(Talk) button operation when

Features

System

Description

On*1/Off

—

2 Phonetic Modification P. 275

—

2 Phonebook Phonetic Modification P. 379

On/Off

*1:Default Setting
Continued

331

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Clock/
Wallpaper
Type*2/
Clock
Type*3

Description

Selectable Settings

Clock
Wallpaper

Clock Adjustment
Auto Time Zone *
Features

Clock
System

See Info on P. 324

Manual Time Zone *
Auto Daylight Saving Time
Clock Format
Clock Display
Overlay Clock Location
Clock Reset

Others

Language

Change the display language.

*1:Default Setting
*2:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
*3:Appears only when you change the screen interface design.

332

* Not available on all models

English*1/Français/
Español

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Description

Selectable Settings

Voice Command Tips

Alerts you when manual control of the system is
disabled to prevent distraction while driving.
Only voice commands are available.

On*1/Off

Remember Last Screen*3

Selects whether the device remembers the last
screen.

On/Off*1

Memory Refresh

Turns on the audio system automatically and
restores the fragmentation of a memory when
the ignition switch is LOCK (0 *2.

On*1/Off

Refresh Time Adjustment

Sets the time for Memory Refresh.

Swipe Direction

Sets the vertical swipe direction on the audio
remote controls.

Normal*1/Invert

4way Switch Gesture

Turns the vertical swipe direction on the audio
remote controls on or off.

On*1/Off

Volume Gestures

Turns the volume swipe direction on the audio
remote controls on or off.

On*1/Off

Change Skin

Changes the screen interface design.

Yes/No

Others

Factory Data Reset

Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 338

Features

System

Customizable Features

—

Yes/No

*1:Default Setting
*2:Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an ignition switch.
*3:Does not appear when you change the screen interface design.
Continued

333

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

334 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Climate screen timeout

Changes the length of time the climate control
display stays on when you press the CLIMATE
button.

Detail Information

Displays the details of the head unit and
operating system information.

Others
System

Features

Vehicle

Selectable Settings
Never/5 Seconds/10
Seconds*1/20
Seconds

Default

Cancels/Resets all customized items in the
System group as default.

Yes/No

TPMS Calibration *

Cancels/Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel/Calibrate

Forward Collision Warning
Distance

Changes CMBSTM alert distance.

Long/Normal*1/Short

ACC Forward Vehicle
Detect Beep

Causes the system to beep when the system
detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of
the ACC range.

On/Off*1

Lane Keeping Assist
Suspend Beep

Causes the system to beep when LKAS is
suspended.

On/Off*1

Road Departure Mitigation
Setting

Changes the setting for the road departure
mitigation system.

Normal*1/Wide/
Warning Only

Driver
Assist
System
Setup *

*1:Default Setting

334

Description

* Not available on all models

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

335 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Meter
Setup

Description

Selectable Settings

Adjust Outside Temp.
Display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few
degrees.

-5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F
(U.S.)
-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C
(Canada)

“Trip A” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A
and average fuel economy A.

When Refueled/IGN
Off/Manually Reset*1

“Trip B” Reset Timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B
and average fuel economy B.

When Refueled/IGN
Off/Manually Reset*1

Adjust Alarm Volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers,
warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

High/Mid*1/Low

Fuel Efficiency Backlight

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Turn By Turn Auto Display

Selects whether the turn-by-turn display comes
on during the route guidance.

On*1/Off

New Message
Notifications

Used to select whether a pop-up alert comes on
the screen when HFL receives a new text/e-mail
message.

On*1/Off

Speed/Distance Units

Selects the trip computer units.

mph∙miles*1/km/h∙km
(U.S.)
mph∙miles/km/h∙km*1
(Canada)

Tachometer

Selects whether the tachometer come on the
driver information interface.

On*1/Off

Features

Vehicle

Customizable Features

*1:Default Setting
Continued

335

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

336 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features

Keyless
Access
Setup *

Features

Vehicle

Selectable Settings

Remote Start System ON/
OFF *

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

On*1/Off

Door Unlock Mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the
driver’s door handle.

Driver Door Only*1/
All Doors

Keyless Access Light Flash

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you
unlock/lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Keyless Access Beep

Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/
lock the doors.

On*1/Off

Interior Light Dimming
Time

Changes the length of time the interior lights stay
on after you close the doors.

15seconds/
30seconds*1/
60seconds

Headlight Auto Off Timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights
stay on after you close the driver’s door.

0seconds/
15seconds*1/
30seconds/
60seconds

Auto Light Sensitivity

Changes the timing for the headlights to come
on.

Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min

Auto Interior Illumination
Sensitivity

Changes the sensitivity of the brightness of the
instrument panel when the headlight switch is in
the AUTO position.

Max/High/Mid*1/
Low/Min

Lighting
Setup

*1:Default Setting

336

Description

* Not available on all models

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

337 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCustomized Featuresu

Setup
Group

Customizable Features
Lighting
Setup

Door/
Window
Setup

Selectable Settings

Auto Headlight ON With
Wiper ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation
when the headlights automatically come on while
the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

On*1/Off

Auto Door Lock

Used to change the setting for when the doors
automatically lock.

With Vehicle
Speed*1/Shift from
P*2/Off

Auto Door Unlock

Changes the setting for when the doors unlock
automatically.

All Doors When
Driver’s Door
Opens*1/All Doors
When Shifted to
Park*2/All Doors
When Ignitions
Switched Off/Off

Key And Remote Unlock
Mode

Sets up the driver’s door or all the doors to unlock
on the first push of the remote.

Driver Door*1/All
Doors

Keyless Lock Answer Back

LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash.
LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.

On*1/Off

Security Relock Timer

Changes the time it takes for the doors to relock
and the security system to set after you unlock
the vehicle without opening any door.

90seconds/
60seconds/
30seconds*1

Walk Away Auto Lock *

Changes the settings for the auto lock function
when you walk away from the vehicle.

On/Off*1

Maintenance Info.

Used to reset the engine oil life display when the
maintenance service has been performed.

Features

Vehicle

Description

—

*1:Default Setting
*2:Continuously variable transmission models
* Not available on all models

337

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Models with Display Audio

Defaulting All the Settings

Features

338

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Others tab.
5. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen.
6. Select Yes to reset the settings.
7. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select OK.
u After selecting OK, the system will
reboot.

1Defaulting All the Settings
When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset
all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the
preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use
the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
2 HondaLink® P. 284

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.

Models with color audio system

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons

Voice control tips

• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the

Microphone

Pick-up Button

Phone Button

Volume down
Talk Button
Hang-up/Back Button

Selector Knob

Features

windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press and release the
button when you want to
call a number using a stored voice tag. Speak
clearly and naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, use the audio system’s
volume knob or the remote audio controls * on the
steering wheel.

Volume up

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of
handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen or to answer an
incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call or to cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to call a number with a stored voice tag.
(Phone) button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen.
Selector knob: Rotate
to select an item on the screen, then press .

If you receive a call while using the audio system, the
system resumes its operation after ending the call.
Up to 20 speed dial entries can be stored. If there is
no entry in the system, Speed Dial is disabled.
2 Speed Dial P. 352
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call
history, Call History is disabled.

* Not available on all models

Continued

339

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display
Battery Level Status

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *

The audio/information screen notifies you
when there is an incoming call.

Signal Strength
Roam Status
Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your
phone is connected
to HFL.
HFL Mode
Call Name

HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.

Features

1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries can be called using voice commands while
the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 352

340

* Not available on all models

You can change the system language to English,
French, or Spanish.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w to use HFL.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

or
Phone

Speed Dial*1

Add New
Some functions are limited while driving. A message
appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving
and the operation is canceled.

Call History*1

Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook to
store as a speed dial number.

Phone Number

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.

Dialed Calls

Display the last 20 outgoing calls.

Received Calls

Display the last 20 incoming calls.

Missed Calls

Display the last 20 missed calls.

Phonebook*1

Display the paired phones’s phonebook.

Dial*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

Features

(Existing entry list)

Call History

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Continued

341

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

342 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Redial*1

Redial the last number dialed in the phone’s history.

Phone Setup

Features
*1 : Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

342

Bluetooth Setup

Add New Device

Pair a phone to the system.

Connect a Phone

Connect a phone to the system.

Connect an Audio Device

Connect a Bluetooth® Audio device to the
system.

Disconnect All Devices

Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

Pass-key

Create a code for a paired phone.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

343 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Speed Dial*1

Add New
Call History

Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

Phone Number

Enter a phone number to store as a speed dial
number.
Features

Existing entry list
Change Speed Dial

*1: Appears only when a phone is connected to HFL.

Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.

Change a previously stored speed dial
number.

Delete Speed Dial

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.

Store Voice Tag

Create a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Change Voice Tag

Change a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Delete Voice Tag

Delete a voice tag for a speed dial number.

Continued

343

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

344 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Ringtone

Caller ID Info
Features
System Clear

344

Mobile Phone

Select the ring tone stored in the connected
cell phone.

Fixed

Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Name Priority

Prioritize the caller’s name as the caller ID.

Number Priority

Prioritize the caller’s phone number as the
caller ID.

Clear the system of all paired phones, phonebook entries,
and security codes.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (No phone has

Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone’s battery may drain faster when it is
paired to HFL.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.

Features

been paired to the system)
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then press .
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. When your phone appears on the list, select
it by pressing .
u If your phone doesn’t appear, select
Phone Not Found? and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, select
HandsFreeLink.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
HFL before you can make and receive hands-free
calls.

5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if
pairing is successful.

Continued

345

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

346 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

Features

4. Rotate
to select Connect a Phone,
then press .
u The screen changes to a device list.

5. Rotate
to select a desired device name,
then press .
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.

346

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

347 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

4. Rotate
.

to select Pass-Key, then press
Features

5. Input a new pairing code, then press

Continued

347

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

348 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Bluetooth Setup, then
press .

Features

4. Rotate
to select Delete Device, then
press .
u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Rotate
to select a phone you want to
delete, then press .

6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.

348

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Ringtone, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select Fixed or Mobile
Phone, then press .

1Caller’s ID Information

You can select a caller’s information to be displayed when you have an incoming
call.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Caller ID Info, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select a mode you want, then
press .

Continued

Name Priority: A caller’s name is displayed if it is
stored in the phonebook.
Number Priority: A caller’s phone number is
displayed.

Features

■ Caller’s ID Information

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the
ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the
speakers.

349

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

350 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To Clear the System
Pairing codes, paired phones, all stored voice tags, all speed dial entries, all call
history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select System Clear, then
press .
4. Rotate
to select Yes, then press .

Features

5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then press
.

6. A notification appears on the screen. Press
.

350

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are
automatically imported to HFL.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

Work

Voice

If a name has four or more numbers, ... appears
instead of category icons.

Features

Pager

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Continued

351

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

Features

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select Add New, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a place to choose a
number from, then press .
From Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
From Phone Number:
u Input the number manually.

Cha
Change
hange
ge Sp
Speed
eed Dial
Delete
Speed
Dial
D lete
Del
ete
t Sp
S
eed
d Di
ia
all

352

1Speed Dial

5. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Rotate
to select Yes or No,
then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
say the name for the speed dial entry.

You can use the audio preset buttons during a call to
store a speed dial number:
1. Press and hold the desired audio preset button
during a call.
2. The contact information for the active call will be
stored for the corresponding speed dial.
When a voice tag is stored, you can press the
button and call the number using voice commands.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

353 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To edit a speed dial
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Change Speed Dial,
then press .
6. Select a new speed dial number, then press
.
Features

Continued

353

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed

Change Speed Dial
Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag

Features

■ To change a voice tag

Change
Cha
nge
e Sp
Speed
peed
ee Di
Dial
al
Delete
Speed
Del
ete Sp
peed
ee Di
Dial
al

354

dial number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Store Voice Tag, then
press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Change Voice Tag,
then press .
6. Using the
button, follow the prompts to
complete the voice tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for HFL to recognize a longer name. For
example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

355 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Delete Speed Dial
Store Voice Tag

Continued

Features

Change Speed Dial

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Delete Voice Tag,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .
■ To delete a speed dial number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phone Setup, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
4. Select an existing speed dial entry.
5. Rotate
to select Delete Speed Dial,
then press .
u A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Rotate
to select Yes, then
press .

355

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or redial.

1Making a Call
Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.
The maximum range between your phone and
vehicles is 30 feet (10 meters).
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.

Features

356

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Dial, then press .
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select
, then press .
u Dialing starts automatically.

Continued

1To make a call using the imported phonebook
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 340
2 Speed Dial P. 352

Features

phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook are automatically imported to
HFL.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Phonebook, then
press .
3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Rotate
to select the initial, then press
.
4. Rotate
to select a name, then press .
5. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a phone number
This function is disabled while the vehicle is moving.
However, you can call a stored voice-tagged speed
dial number using voice commands.
2 Limitations for Manual Operation P. 340
2 Speed Dial P. 352

357

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using redial
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Redial, then press
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using redial

■ To make a call using the call history

Features

358

Call history is stored by Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, and Missed Calls.
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Call History, then
press .
3. Rotate
to select Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, or Missed Calls, then press .
4. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

Press and hold the
button to redial the last
number dialed in your phone’s call history.

1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is
connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed,
received, or missed calls.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using a speed dial entry
1. Press the
button or the
button.
2. Rotate
to select Speed Dial, then press
.
3. Rotate
to select a number, then press
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a speed dial entry
On the Phone screen, the first six speed dials on the
list can be directly selected by pressing the
corresponding audio preset buttons (1-6).
Select Others to view another paired phone’s speed
dial list.
When a voice tag is stored, press the
button and
call the number using voice commands.
2 Speed Dial P. 352

Continued

Features

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen. Press the
button and
follow the prompts.

359

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call
HFL Mode

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds and the Incoming Call
screen appears.
Press the
Press the
call.

Caller’s Name

Features

360

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold
to answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the
and
buttons. Rotate
to select the icon, then press
.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Options During a Call

Dial Tones: Available on some phones.

Features

The following options are available during a call.
Swap Call: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer Call: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.
Dial Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven
phone system.
1. To view the available options, press the
button.
2. Rotate
to select the option, then press
.
u The check box is checked when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

1Options During a Call

361

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *
Models with Display Audio

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using
your vehicle’s audio system, without handling your cell phone.

To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell
phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing
procedures, and special feature capabilities:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.

Using HFL
■ HFL Buttons
3 4

Place your phone where you can get good reception.

Buttons

Microphone

ENTER Button

To use the system, the Bluetooth On/Off Status
setting must be On. If there is an active connection to
Apple CarPlay, HFL is unavailable.
2 How to customize P. 315

Features

(+ (- Bar

Button
(Talk) Button
(Hang-up/Back) Button
(Pick-up) Button

Voice control tips
• Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
• Press the
button when you want to call a
number using a stored voice tag. Speak clearly and
naturally after a beep.
• If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
• To change the volume level, select the audio
system’s VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio
controls on the steering wheel.
Up to five speed dial entries can be displayed among
a total of 20 that can be entered.
2 Speed Dial P. 376
Up to five previous calls can be displayed at a time
among a total of 20 that can be entered. If there is no
call history, Call History is disabled.

362

* Not available on all models

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uUsing HFL

(Pick-up) button: Press to go directly to the phone menu on the driver
information interface, or to answer an incoming call.
(Hang-up/back) button: Press to end a call, go back to the previous
command, or cancel a command.
(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal.
3 4 buttons: Press to select an item displayed on the phone menu in the driver
information interface.
ENTER button: Press to call a number listed in the selected item on the phone
menu in the driver information interface.
button: Select and press ENTER to display Speed Dial, Call History, or
Phonebook on the phone menu in the driver information interface.

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any
use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under
license. Other trademarks and trade names are those
of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations
An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio
system when it is playing. It will resume when the call
is ended.
Features

To go to the Phone menu screen:
1. Select
.
2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen.
3. Select
.

* Not available on all models

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® *

Continued

363

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uUsing HFL

■ HFL Status Display

1HFL Status Display

The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.
Bluetooth Indicator
Battery Level Status
HFL Mode

Appears when your phone is
connected to HFL.

Signal Strength

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Number
Features

■ Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion.
You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored speed dial entries with voice tags, phonebook names, or
numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Speed Dial P. 376

364

The information that appears on the audio/
information screen varies between phone models.
You can change the system language.
2 How to customize P. 315

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The ignition switch must be in ACCESSORY (q or ON (w *1 to use HFL.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle
is parked.

■ Phone settings screen
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Phone.

Some functions are limited while driving.

Features

Phone

Bluetooth Device List

Connect
Connect
Connect

(Existing entry list)

Disconnect
Delete
Add Bluetooth Device

Connect a paired device to
the system.
Disconnect a paired phone
from the system.
Delete a paired phone.

Pair a new phone to the system.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

365

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

366 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

Edit

Edit a previously stored speed dial number.
●
●
●

Delete
New Entry

Features
Delete All
Ring Tone
Automatic Phone Sync
HondaLink Assist

366

Manual Input

Change a name.
Change a number.
Create or delete a voice tag.

Delete a previously stored speed dial number.
Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.

Import from Call History

Select a phone number from the call history
to store as a speed dial number.

Import from Phonebook

Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

Delete all of the previously stored speed dial numbers.

Select the fixed or mobile phone.
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL.
Turn HondaLink Assist on and off.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

367 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Text/Email

Enable Text/Email
Select Account
New Message Notification

Default

Turn the text/e-mail message function on and off.
Select a mail or text message account.
Select whether a pop-up alert comes on the screen when HFL
receives a new text/e-mail message.

Cancel/Reset all customized items in the Phone settings group as default.
Features
Continued

367

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

368 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Phone menu screen
1. Select
.
2. Select Phone.
3. Select
.

Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)

Features

New Entry

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Manual Input
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook

Edit Speed Dial

(Existing entry list)
New Entry

Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

Dial the selected number in the speed dial list.
Manual Input
Import from Call History
Import from Phonebook

368

Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.

Enter a phone number to store as a speed
dial number.
Select a phone number from the call history to
store as a speed dial number.
Select a phone number from the phonebook
to store as a speed dial number.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

369 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Phonebook

Display the paired phone’s phonebook.

Redial

Redial the last number dialed.

Dial

Enter a phone number to dial.

Call History

All
Dialed

Display the last outgoing calls.

Received

Display the last incoming calls.
Display the last missed calls.

(Existing message list)

Read/Stop

Features

Missed
Text/Email

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls.

System reads received message aloud, or
stop message from being read.
See the previous message.
See the next message.

Dial

Select Account

Reply to a received message using one of six
fixed phrases.
Make a call to the sender.

Select a mail or text message account.

Continued

369

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Phone Setup

1Phone Setup

■ To pair a cell phone (when there is no

Features

370

phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone.
2. Select Yes.
3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode, then select Continue.
u HFL automatically searches for a
Bluetooth® device.
4. Select your phone when it appears on the
list.
u If your phone does not appear, you can
select Refresh to search again.
u If your phone still does not appear, select
Phone Not Found and search for
Bluetooth® devices using your phone.
From your phone, search for
HandsFreeLink.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the
audio/information screen.
u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen
and your phone match.
This may vary by phone.

Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to
the system before you can make and receive handsfree calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
• You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
• Up to six phones can be paired.
• Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
• If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will
time out and return to idle.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it
displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the
right side.
These icons indicate the following:
: The phone can be used with HFL.
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay,
pairing of additional Bluetooth-compatible devices is
unavailable and Add Bluetooth Device is grayed
out from the Bluetooth Device List screen.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To change the currently paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone
and starts searching for another paired
phone.
4. Select Connect
, Connect , or
Connect .

If no other phones are found or paired when trying to
switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the
original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select Add Bluetooth Device
from the Bluetooth device list screen.

1To change the pairing code setting
The default pairing code is 0000 until you change the
setting.
To create your own, select Fixed, and delete the
current code, then enter a new one.

Features

■ To change the pairing code setting
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth/Wi-Fi.
4. Select the Bluetooth tab.
5. Select Edit Pairing Code.

1To change the currently paired phone

For a randomly generated pairing code each time you
pair a phone, select Random.

6. Select Random or Fixed.

Continued

371

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To delete a paired phone
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select Bluetooth Device List.
3. Select a phone you want to delete.

Features

372

4. Select Delete.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options

1To Set Up Text/E-mail Message Options

■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail
function
1. Go to the phone settings screen.

To use the text/e-mail message function, it may be
necessary to set up on your phone.

2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Enable
Text/Email.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then New
Message Notification.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

Continued

1To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
On: A pop-up notification comes on every time you
receive a new message.
Off: The message you receive is stored in the system
without notification.

Features

■ To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
1. Go to the phone settings screen.

373

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Ring Tone

1Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone setting.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select Ring Tone.
3. Select Fixed or Mobile Phone.

Features

374

Fixed: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.
Mobile Phone: For certain connected phones, the
ring tone stored in the phone sounds from the
speakers.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
■ When Automatic Phone Sync is set to
On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its
phonebook and call history are automatically
imported to the system.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular
phonebook, you can see up to three category icons.
The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored
for that name.
Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Other

■ Changing the Automatic Phone Sync

Work

Voice

setting
1. Go to the phone settings screen.

Pager

Blank

2 Phone settings screen P. 365
On some phones, it may not be possible to import the
category icons to the system.

2. Select Automatic Phone Sync.

Features

Pref

The phonebook is updated after every connection.
Call history is updated after every connection or call.

3. Select On or Off.

Continued

375

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Speed Dial

1Speed Dial

Up to 20 speed dial numbers can be stored per phone.
To store a speed dial number:
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 368

Features

2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select New Entry.
From Import from Call History:
u Select a number from the call history.
From Manual Input:
u Input the number manually.
From Import from Phonebook:
u Select a number from the connected cell
phone’s imported phonebook.
4. When the speed dial is successfully stored,
you are asked to create a voice tag for the
number. Select Yes or No.

5. Select Record, or use the
button and
follow the prompts to complete the voice
tag.

376

When a voice tag is stored, press the
button to
call the number using the voice tag. Say the voice tag
name.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To add a voice tag to a stored speed
dial number
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Record.
5. Select Record, or use the
button and
follow the prompts to complete the voice
tag.

1Speed Dial
Avoid using duplicate voice tags.
Avoid using “home” as a voice tag.
It is easier for the system to recognize a longer name.
For example, use “John Smith” instead of “John.”

Features

■ To delete a voice tag
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select Voice Tag.
u From the pop-up menu, select Clear.
5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

Continued

377

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To edit a speed dial
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Edit.
4. Select a setting you want.

■ To delete a speed dial
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 365
Features

378

2. Select Edit Speed Dial.
3. Select an existing speed dial entry.
u From the pop-up menu, select Delete.
4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Phonebook Phonetic Modification

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Continued

You can store up to 20 phonetic modification items.

Features

Add phonetic modifications or a new voice tag to the phone’s contact name so that
it is easier for HFL to recognize voice commands.
■ To add a new voice tag
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to add
phonetic modification to.

379

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

380 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

7. Select New Voice Tag.
8. Select a contact name you want to add to.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
9. Select Modify.
10. Using Record or the
button, follow
the prompts to complete the voice tag.
11. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.

Features

380

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To modify a voice tag

1Phonebook Phonetic Modification

Continued

You can only modify or delete contact names for the
currently connected phone.

Features

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to modify
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to
modify.
u The pop-up menu appears on the
screen.
8. Select Modify.
9. Using Record or the
button, follow
the prompts to complete the voice tag.
10. You will receive a confirmation message
on the screen, then select OK.

381

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

382 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To delete a modified voice tag

Features

382

1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
7. Select a contact name you want to delete.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
8. Select Delete.
u The selected contact name has been
selected.
9. Select OK.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Features

■ To delete all modified voice tags
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select System.
4. Select the Voice Recog tab.
5. Select Phonebook Phonetic
Modification.
6. Select the phone you want to delete
phonetic modification.
u The contact name list appears.
7. Select Delete All.
8. You will receive a confirmation message on
the screen, then select Yes.

1Making a Call

■ Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone
number, or by using the imported
phonebook, call history, speed dial entries, or
redial.

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from most screens.
Press the
button and say the voice tag name.
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of
the person you are calling through the audio
speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple
CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with
HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple
CarPlay.

Continued

383

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using the imported
phonebook
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 368

Features

2. Select Phonebook.
3. Select a name.
u You can also search by letter. Select
Search.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering name, if multiple numbers exist
select a number.
u You can also swipe up or down to scroll
through the list of contacts alphabetically
on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 208

4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a phone number
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 368

2. Select Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for
entering numbers.
4. Select
.
u Dialing starts automatically.

384

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To make a call using redial
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 368

2. Select Redial.
u Dialing starts automatically.

2 Phone menu screen P. 368

1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed,
received, or missed calls.
(Appears only when a phone is connected to the
system.)

Features

■ To make a call using the Call History
Call history is stored by All, Dialed,
Received, and Missed.
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2. Select Call History.
3. Select All, Dialed, Received, or Missed.
4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

■ To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 368

2. Select Speed Dial.
3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using a Speed Dial entry
When a voice tag is stored, press the
call the number using the voice tag.
2 Speed Dial P. 376

button to

Any voice-tagged speed dial entry can be dialed by
voice from any screen.
Press the
button and follow the prompts.

Continued

385

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Call

1Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible
notification sounds (if activated) and the
Incoming call screen appears.
Press the
Press the
call.

button to answer the call.
button to decline or end the

Call Waiting
Press the
button to put the current call on hold to
answer the incoming call.
Press the
button again to return to the current
call.
Select Ignore to ignore the incoming call if you do
not want to answer it.
Press the
button if you want to hang up the
current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen instead of the
and
buttons.

Features

■ Options During a Call

1Options During a Call

The following options are available during a call.
Mute: Mute your voice.
Transfer: Transfer a call from the system to your phone.
Touch Tones: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menudriven phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower
Mute Icon
half of the screen.
Select the option.
u The mute icon appears when Mute is
selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

386

Touch Tones: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information
screen.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Receiving a Text/E-mail Message

1Receiving a Text/E-mail Message
The system does not display any received messages
while you are driving. You can only hear them read
aloud.
The system can only receive messages that are sent a
text (SMS) messages. The message sent using the
data services will not be displayed in the list.
With some phones, you may be able to display up to
20 most recent text and e-mail messages.
State or local laws may limit your use of the HFL text/
e-mail message feature. Only use the text/e-mail
message feature when conditions allow you to do so
safely.

Features

HFL can display newly received text or e-mail messages as well as 20 of the most
recently received messages on a linked cell phone. Each received message can be
read aloud and replied to using a fixed common phrase.
1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a new
text or e-mail message.
2. Select Read to listen to the message.
u The text or e-mail message is displayed.
The system automatically starts reading
out the message.
3. To discontinue the message read-out, select
Stop.

When you receive a text or e-mail message for the
first time since the phone is paired to HFL, you are
asked to turn the New Message Notification
setting to On.
2 To turn on or off the text/e-mail notice
P. 373

Continued

387

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Selecting a Mail Account

1Selecting a Mail Account

If a paired phone has text or mail message accounts, you can select one of them to
be active and receive notifications.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.

You can also select a mail account from the folder list
screen or the message list screen.

2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select the Text/Email tab, then Select
Account.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select Text Messages or an e-mail account
you want.
Features

Select
Account

You can only receive notifications from one text or
mail message account at a time.

388

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Displaying Messages
Message List

1Displaying Messages

■ Displaying text messages

The

1. Go to the Phone menu screen.

If you delete a message on the phone, the message is
also deleted in the system. If you send a message
from the system, the message goes to your phone’s
outbox.

2 Phone menu screen P. 368

2. Select Text/Email.
u Select account if necessary.
3. Select a message.
u The text message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

icon appears next to an unread message.

To see the previous or next message, select
(previous) or
(next) on the message screen.

Text Message
Features

Continued

389

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

Folder List

■ Displaying e-mail messages
1. Go to the Phone menu screen.
2 Phone menu screen P. 368

Message List

Features
E-mail
Message

390

2. Select Text/Email.
u Select Select Account if necessary.
3. Select a folder.
4. Select a message.
u The e-mail message is displayed. The
system automatically starts reading the
message aloud.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Read or Stop reading a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.
2 Displaying Messages P. 389

2. Select Stop to stop reading.
Select Read again to start reading the
message from the beginning.

2 Displaying Messages P. 389

2. Select Reply.
3. Select the reply message.
u The pop-up menu appears on the screen.
4. Select Send to send the message.
u Complete appears on the screen when
the reply message was successfully sent.

Continued

1Reply to a message
The available fixed reply messages are as follows:
• Talk to you later, I’m driving.
• I’m on my way.
• I’m running late.
• OK
• Yes
• No

Features

■ Reply to a message
1. Go to the text or e-mail message screen.
u The system automatically starts reading
the message aloud.

You cannot add, edit, or delete reply messages.
Only certain phones receive and send messages when
paired and connected. For a list of compatible
phones:
• U.S.: Visit www.handsfreelink.honda.com, or call
1-888-528-7876.
• Canada: Visit www.handsfreelink.ca, or call 1-888528-7876.

391

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

392 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ Making a call to a sender
1. Go to the text message screen.
2. Select Dial.

Features

392

午後６時５分

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ In Case of Emergency

1In Case of Emergency

■ Automatic collision notification
If your vehicle’s airbags deploy or if the unit
detects that the vehicle is severely impacted,
your vehicle automatically will attempt to
connect to the HondaLink operator. If
connected, information about your vehicle, its
location, and its condition can be sent to the
operator*1; you also can speak to the operator
when connected.

Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for
any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in,
or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental
regulation.

You cannot use this emergency service when:
• You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
• There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit
itself.
You cannot operate other phone-related functions
using the screen while talking to the operator.
Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your
vehicle.

Features

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation
constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed
to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/
TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency
services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT
SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.

Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the
operator if the battery level is low, the line is
disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular
coverage.

1Automatic collision notification
If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it
repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle’s location may not
be sent to the operator.
Continued

393

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink® * uHFL Menus

■ To enable notification

1To enable notification

1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 365

2. Select the Phone tab, then HondaLink
Assist.
u A pop-up menu appears on the screen.
3. Select On or Off.

Features

394

Setting options:
• On: Notification is available.
• Off: Disable the feature.

Driving
This chapter discusses driving, refueling, and information on items such as accessories.

Before Driving
Driving Preparation .......................... 396
Maximum Load Limit........................ 399
Towing a Trailer................................ 401
When Driving
Starting the Engine .................. 402, 404
Precautions While Driving................. 409
Continuously Variable Transmission * ... 410
Shifting .................................... 411, 413
ECON Button ................................... 416
Cruise Control * ................................ 417
Front Sensor Camera * ...................... 420

* Not available on all models

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) * ....................... 422
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System * ...... 436

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) * .... 440
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System........... 447
LaneWatchTM * .................................. 450
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 452
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation ......... 455
Braking
Brake System ................................... 457
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 463

Brake Assist System ......................... 464
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) * ..................................... 465
Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped ................................ 473
Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 474
Refueling
Fuel Information .............................. 476
How to Refuel ................................. 477
Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing
CO2 Emissions................................ 479
Turbo Engine Vehicle *
Handling Precautions ....................... 480

395

Before Driving
Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

■ Exterior Checks
• Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior
lights, or other parts of the vehicle.
u Remove any frost, snow, or ice.
u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of
vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened.
u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel
or wheel components.
• Make sure the hood is securely closed.
u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
• Make sure the tires are in good condition.
u Check air pressure, check for damage and excessive wear.
Driving

396

2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 522

• Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle.
u There are blind spots from the inside.

1Exterior Checks
NOTICE

When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around
the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force
them open, as this can damage the rubber trim
around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid
further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder.
You will be unable to insert key if the water freezes in
the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite
flammable materials left under the hood, causing a
fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended
period, inspect and remove any debris that may have
collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have
fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a
small animal. Also check under the hood for leftover
flammable materials after you or someone else has
performed maintenance on your vehicle.

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

■ Interior Checks

1Interior Checks

• Store or secure all items on board properly.
u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.

The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

2 Maximum Load Limit P. 399

2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 140

• Adjust your seating position properly.
u Adjust the front head restraint, too.

Driving

• Do not pile items higher than the seat height.
u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden
braking.
• Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor
mat.
u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator
pedal operation while driving.
• If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle.
u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
• Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.

2 Adjusting the Seats P. 173
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 176

• Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly for your driving.
u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Adjusting the Mirrors P. 171
2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 170

Continued

397

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

• Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the
seats.
u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation
of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
• Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 42

• Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the
vehicle, and go off soon after.
u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 76

Driving

398

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the
Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver’s
doorjamb.

1Maximum Load Limit

3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading
can affect handling and stability
and cause a crash in which you
can be hurt or killed.

Label Example

Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this manual.
This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and
accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Continued

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 576, 578

Driving

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers
that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR):
The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 576, 578

399

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

400 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Load Limits Example
Driving

Example1

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs
(68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight
550 lbs
(249 kg)

Max Load
850 lbs
(385 kg)

Passenger Weight
150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs
(68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight
100 lbs
(45 kg)

Example2

400

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your
warranties.

Towing Your Vehicle
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs
to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 571

Driving

401

When Driving
Models without smart entry system

Starting the Engine

1Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up the electric parking brake switch.

Brake Pedal

Continuously variable transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, heating
system */climate control system *, and rear defogger in
order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

Driving

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Clutch Pedal

Brake Pedal

402

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.

* Not available on all models

Manual transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

All models

3. Turn the ignition switch to START (e
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

■ Starting to Drive
Continuously variable transmission models

2 Parking Brake P. 457

■ Hill start assist system
Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Manual transmission models

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (D , (S , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Do not hold the key in START (e for more than 10
seconds.
• If the engine does not start right away, wait for at
least 30 seconds before trying again.
• If the engine starts, but then immediately stops,
wait at least 30 seconds before repeating step 3
while gently depressing the accelerator pedal.
Release the accelerator pedal once the engine
starts.
The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is
used, the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 150
1Starting to Drive
You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.

Driving

1. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the shift lever in (D . Select (R
when reversing.
2. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake indicator goes off.

1Starting the Engine

1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.

403

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Models with smart entry system

Starting the Engine

1Starting the Engine

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The electric parking brake indicator
comes on for 15 seconds when you pull
up the electric parking brake switch.

Brake Pedal

Continuously variable transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (P , then
depress the brake pedal.
u Although it is possible to start the vehicle
in (N , it is safer to start it in (P .

The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in
thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters).
When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories such as the lights, climate
control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce
battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold,
an engine block heater will improve starting and
warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.

Driving

If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can
smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with
the engine or exhaust system.
Clutch Pedal

Brake Pedal

404

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
starting the engine.

Manual transmission models

2. Check that the shift lever is in (N . Then
depress the brake pedal with your right
foot, and the clutch pedal with your left
foot.
u The clutch pedal must be fully depressed
to start the engine.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from
theft.
If an improperly coded device is used, the engine’s
fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 150

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

All models

1Starting the Engine

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button
without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Bring the smart entry remote close to the ENGINE
START/STOP button if the battery in the smart entry
remote is weak.
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak
P. 553
The engine may not start if the smart entry remote is
subjected to strong radio waves.
Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to
start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds
before trying again.

■ Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Continuously variable transmission models

Manual transmission models

• If the shift lever is in (N , press the ENGINE START/STOP button.
• If the shift lever is in any gear other than (N , depress the clutch pedal, then press
the ENGINE START/STOP button.

Continued

Driving

1. Shift to (P .
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

405

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *
You can remotely start the engine using the

button on the smart entry remote.

3 WARNING
Engine exhaust contains toxic carbon
monoxide.

■ To start the engine
Press the
button, then press and hold
the
button.
Some exterior lights flash once.

Go within the range,
and try again.

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

Breathing carbon monoxide can kill you or
cause unconsciousness.
Never use the remote engine starter when
the vehicle is parked in a garage or other
area with limited ventilation.

Driving

The remote engine start may violate local laws.
Before using the remote engine start, check your
local laws.

Some exterior lights flash six
times if the engine runs
successfully.

Some exterior lights will not
flash if the engine runs
unsuccessfully.

When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling
and the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed
simultaneously.
To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the
button, then press and hold the
button.
u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was
transmitted successfully.

406

1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *

* Not available on all models

If there are buildings and obstacles between your
vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced.
The range may be less when the vehicle is running.
This distance may vary by external electrical
interference.
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
• You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the audio/information screen *.
• The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).
• The gear is in a position other than (P .
• The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ To stop the engine

1Remote Engine Start with Vehicle Feedback *

• You have already used the remote twice to start

Go within the range,
and try again.

the engine.

• Another registered smart entry remote is in the

The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of
the smart entry system range.
The engine will not stop.

The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully.

* Not available on all models

Continued

While the engine is running, the vehicle will
automatically activate climate control with a preset
temperature of 72°F (22°C).
When it is warm outside:
• The air conditioning is activated in recirculation
mode.
When it is cold outside:
• The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
• The rear defogger, door mirror heaters, and seat
heaters * are activated.

Driving

Press and hold the
button for one
second.

vehicle.

• There is an antenna failure.
• Door is unlocked with the built-in key.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The engine coolant temperature is extremely high.
• The security system alarm is not set.

407

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

■ Starting to Drive

1Starting to Drive
When the engine was started using the
on the smart entry remote

Continuously variable transmission models
When the engine was started using the

button * on the smart entry remote

1. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button
simultaneously.

button *

The engine stops when the shift lever is moved out of
(P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is
pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

When the engine was started in any case

2. Put the shift lever in (D . Select (R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake is applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal.
u Make sure the parking brake indicator goes off.
4. Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to pull
away.

■ Hill start assist system
Driving

Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from
rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Manual transmission models

Depress the clutch pedal, and shift to one of the forward gears when facing uphill,
or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.
Continuously variable transmission models

Move the shift lever to (D , (S , or (L when facing uphill, or (R when facing
downhill, then release the brake pedal.

408

* Not available on all models

You can also release the parking brake by pressing
the electric parking brake switch while depressing the
brake pedal.
When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle
more smoothly by manually releasing it with the
electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with
the accelerator pedal.
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from
rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and
does not operate on small inclines.
Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking
brake.

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving
■ In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or
driveline, or cause electrical component failure.

■ Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location.
Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE

Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the
accelerator pedal. You could damage the
transmission.
If the ignition switch is turned to ACCESSORY (q *1
while driving, the engine will shut down and all
steering and brake power assist functions will stop,
making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not put the shift lever in (N , as you will lose
engine braking (and acceleration) performance.
During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation,
avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so
as not to damage the engine or powertrain.
Driving

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).
You should also follow this when the brake pads are
replaced.
NOTICE

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an
extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel on
the full left or right position for a while, the electric
power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system
goes into a protective mode, and limits its
performance. The steering wheel becomes harder
and harder to operate. Once the system cools down,
the EPS system is restored.
Repeated operation under these conditions can
eventually damage the system.

409

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

410 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission *

Continuously Variable Transmission *
■ Creeping
The engine runs at a higher idle speed and creeping increases.
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.

■ Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the
transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed.
Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.

Driving

410

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Continuously variable transmission models

Shifting

1Shifting

Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.

You cannot turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1
and remove the key unless the shift lever is in (P .

■ Shift lever positions
Park
Used when parking or starting the
engine

The vehicle may move forward very slightly even in
(N while the engine is cold.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary,
apply the parking brake.

Reverse
Used when reversing
Neutral
Used when idling
Driving

Drive
Used for normal driving

Release Button

Drive (S)
Used:
● For better acceleration
● To increase engine braking
● When going up or down hills
Low
● Used to further increase engine braking
● Used when going up or down hills

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

411

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

1Shift Lever Operation
NOTICE

Models with information display

Shift Lever Position
Indicator

When you change the shift lever from (D to (R and
vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come
to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Tachometer’s
red zone

If the transmission indicator blinks when driving, in
any shift position, there is a problem with the
transmission.
Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission
checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Models with driver information interface

Driving

Shift Lever Position
Indicator
Tachometer’s
red zone

Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release
button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.

412

Use the shift lever position indicator to check the
lever position before pulling away.

The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine
speeds in or over the tachometer’s red zone (engine
speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a
slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the
brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release
button is held down.
Depress the brake pedal first.
When shifting positions in extremely low
temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short
delay before the shift position is displayed. Always
confirm you are in the correct shift position before
driving.

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Manual transmission models

Shifting

1Shifting

■ Shift Lever Operation

NOTICE

Fully depress the clutch pedal to operate the shift lever and change gears, then
slowly release the pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal, and pause for a few seconds before shifting into (R , or
shift into one of the forward gears for a moment. This stops the gears so they do not
“grind.”

Do not shift to (R before the vehicle comes to a
complete stop.
Shifting to (R before stopping can damage the
transmission.
NOTICE

Before downshifting, make sure the engine will not
go into the tachometer's red zone. Should this occur,
it can severely damage your engine.

Continued

Driving

There is a metallic part on the shift lever. If you leave
the vehicle parked outside for a long time on a hot
day, be careful before moving the shift lever. Because
of heat, the shift lever may be extremely hot. If the
outside temperature is low, the shift lever may feel
cold.

413

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

When you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can cause your
clutch to wear out faster.

1Shifting
Recommended Shift Points
Driving in the highest gear that allows the engine to
run and accelerate smoothly helps to optimize fuel
economy and effective emissions control. The
following shift points are recommended:
1.5 L engine models

Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

Normal Acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
27 mph (43 km/h)
33 mph (52 km/h)
36 mph (57 km/h)
39 mph (63 km/h)

2.0 L engine models

Driving

Shift Up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th

Normal Acceleration
16 mph (25 km/h)
26 mph (42 km/h)
35 mph (56 km/h)
41 mph (66 km/h)
43 mph (69 km/h)

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you
are in, the engine speed will enter into the
tachometer’s red zone. When this happens, you may
experience a slight jolt.

414

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

415 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

■ Reverse Lockout
The manual transmission has a lockout mechanism that stops you from accidentally
shifting into (R from a forward gear while the vehicle is moving above a certain
speed.
If you cannot shift to (R when the vehicle is stopped, do the following:

Have the vehicle checked by a dealer if you
have to go through this procedure repeatedly.

Driving

1. Depress the clutch pedal, move the shift
lever all the way to the left, and shift to (R .
2. If you still cannot shift into (R , apply the
parking brake, and turn the ignition switch
to ACCESSORY (q or LOCK (0 *1.
3. Depress the clutch pedal and shift into (R .
4. Keep depressing the clutch pedal and start
the engine.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

415

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

416 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button

ECON Button
Models with information display

Models with driver information interface

Driving

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off.
The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the
performance of the engine, transmission, heating system */climate control system *,
and cruise control *.

416

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

Cruise Control *
Maintains a constant vehicle speed without having to keep your foot on the
accelerator. Use cruise control on freeways or open roads where you can travel at a
constant speed with little acceleration or deceleration.

Desired speed in a range above
roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~

Continuously variable transmission models

3 WARNING
Improper use of the cruise control can lead
to a crash.

When to use

■ Vehicle speed for cruise control:

1Cruise Control *

Always keep sufficient distance
between you and the vehicle in
front of you.

Use the cruise control only when traveling
on open highways in good weather.

■ Shift positions for cruise control:
In (D or (S

How to use

It may not be possible to maintain a constant speed
when driving uphill or downhill.
CRUISE MAIN is on in the
instrument panel.

Cruise control is ready to use.

While in ECON mode, it may take relatively more time
to accelerate to maintain the set speed.

steering wheel.

Driving

■ Press the CRUISE button on the

When not using cruise control:
Turn off cruise control by pressing the CRUISE
button.

Manual transmission models

When the engine speed slows down, try to
downshift.
You can maintain the set speed if you change gear
within five seconds.

*1 : Models with information display
*2 : Models with driver information interface

* Not available on all models

Continued

417

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

418 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
–/SET Button
*1

Press and release
On when cruise control begins
Driving

Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist Function is activated. This control
function is an EPS function and it helps reduce the steering effort to keep the
steering angle on a straight road with cants.

*1 : Models with information display
*2 : Models with driver information interface

418

uuWhen DrivinguCruise Control *

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET buttons on the
steering wheel.

You can set the vehicle speed using the –/SET button
on the steering wheel when adjusting the speed with
the accelerator and brake pedals.

To increase speed

To decrease speed

■ To Cancel

CANCEL
Button
CRUISE
Button

* Not available on all models

To cancel cruise control, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the CRUISE button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal * for five seconds
or more.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

1To Cancel

Driving

• Each time you press the button, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• If you keep the button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or decreases until you
release it. This speed is then set.

Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.
You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the CRUISE button is turned on.
At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control is canceled automatically.

419

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera *

Front Sensor Camera *
The camera, used in systems such as LKAS, RDM, ACC with LSF, and CMBSTM, is
designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate its
functions.

■ Camera Location and Handling Tips
Front Sensor
Camera

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior
temperatures will cause the camera’s sensing
system to shut off, when parking, find a shady
area or face the front of the vehicle away from
the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do
not allow it to cover the camera housing.
Covering the camera can concentrate heat on
it.

Driving

420

This camera is located behind the rearview
mirror.

* Not available on all models

1Front Sensor Camera *
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the
windshield, the hood, or the front grill that could
obstruct the camera’s field of vision and cause the
system to operate abnormally.
Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield
within the camera’s field of vision can cause the
system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we
recommend that you replace the windshield with a
genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making
even minor repairs within the camera’s field of vision
or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield
may also cause the system to operate abnormally.
After replacing the windshield, have a dealer
recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the
camera is necessary for the system to operate
properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument
panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent
the system from detecting lane lines properly.

uuWhen DrivinguFront Sensor Camera *

1Front Sensor Camera *
If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Camera Temperature Too High message
appears:
• Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode
with the airflow directed towards the camera.
• Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around
the camera.

* Not available on all models

Driving

If the Some Driver Assist Systems Cannot
Operate: Clean Front Windshield message
appears:
• Park your vehicle in a safe place, and clean the
windshield. If the message does not disappear after
you have cleaned the windshield and driven for a
while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

421

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following interval behind a vehicle
detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate
and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the
accelerator.
When ACC with LSF slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle’s brake
lights will illuminate.

3 WARNING
Improper use of ACC with LSF can lead
to a crash.
Use ACC with LSF only when driving on
expressways or freeways and in good
weather conditions.

When to use

The camera is
located behind
the rearview
mirror.

3 WARNING

Driving

ACC with LSF has limited braking
capability and may not stop your vehicle
in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle
that quickly stops in front of you.
The radar sensor is in
the lower bumper
next to the fog light.
Be careful not to have
the radar sensor cover
strongly impacted.

■ Vehicle speed for ACC with LSF: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with

LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
No vehicle is detected within ACC with LSF range – ACC with LSF operates at
the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.
■ Shift position for ACC with LSF: In (D or (S .

422

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

* Not available on all models

Always be prepared to apply the brake
pedal if the conditions require.
Important Reminder
As with any system, there are limits to ACC with LSF.
Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always
keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other
vehicles.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ How to activate the system

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

How to use

ACC (green) is on in the instrument panel.
ACC with LSF is ready to use.

■ Press the MAIN button on
the steering wheel.

When the MAIN button is pressed, both ACC with
LSF and the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) are
either turned on or off.
ACC with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2 ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 427
When not using ACC with LSF: Turn off adaptive
cruise by pressing the MAIN button. This also will
turn off the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).

* Not available on all models

Continued

Driving

Do not use ACC with LSF under the following
conditions:
• On roads with heavy traffic or while driving in
continuous stop and go traffic.
• On roads with sharp turns.
• On roads with steep downhill sections, as the set
vehicle speed can be exceeded by coasting. In such
cases, ACC with LSF will not apply the brakes to
maintain the set speed.
• On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking
areas, or facilities with drive through access.

423

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed

1To Set the Vehicle Speed
−/SET button

On when ACC with LSF
begins

Press and release

Driving

When driving at 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and
press the –/SET button when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release
the button, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with LSF begins.
When driving slower than 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the
brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the button fixes the set speed to 25 mph (40
km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is stationary and a vehicle
is detected ahead, your vehicle speed can be set, even with the brake pedal
depressed.
When ACC with LSF starts operating, the
Set Vehicle Interval
vehicle icon, interval bars and set speed
appear on the driver information interface.

Set Vehicle Speed

424

* Not available on all models

You can switch the displayed set speed
measurements on the driver information interface */
audio/information screen * between mph and km/h.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ When in Operation

1When in Operation

■ There is a vehicle ahead
ACC with LSF monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with LSF range. If a
vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with LSF system maintains or decelerates your
vehicle’s set speed in order to keep the vehicle’s set following interval from the
vehicle ahead.

If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if
another vehicle cuts in front of you, the beeper
sounds, a message appears on the driver information
interface.
Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate
interval from the vehicle ahead.

2 To Set or Change Following Interval P. 430
Beep

When a vehicle whose speed is slower than
your set speed is detected in front of you, your
vehicle starts to slow down.

A vehicle icon appears on the
driver information interface

Even if the interval between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead is short, ACC with LSF may start
accelerating your vehicle under the following
circumstances:
• The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
• A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval
between the vehicles.

Driving

ACC with LSF Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in
front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with
LSF detecting range. Change the ACC Forward
Vehicle Detect Beep setting.
2 Customized Features P. 118, 308
Continued

425

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ There is no vehicle ahead

25
A vehicle icon with dotted-line
contour appears on the driver
information interface

1When in Operation

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without
having to keep your foot on the brake or
accelerator pedal.
If there previously was a vehicle detected
ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at
the set speed, ACC with LSF accelerates your
vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.

Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped
while the ACC with LSF system is
operating can result in the vehicle
moving without operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator
control can cause a crash, resulting in
serious injury or death.

■ When you depress the accelerator pedal

Driving

You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or
visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with LSF range.
ACC with LSF stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal,
the system resumes an appropriate speed for keeping the following interval while a
vehicle ahead is within the ACC with LSF range.

■ A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with LSF range and slows to a stop
Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The
Stopped message appears on the driver
information interface.
When the vehicle ahead of you starts again,
the vehicle icon on the driver information
interface blinks. If you press the RES/+ or –/
SET button, or depress the accelerator pedal,
ACC with LSF operates again within the prior
set speed.

426

3 WARNING

Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is
stopped by ACC with LSF.
Limitations
You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe
interval when using ACC with LSF. Additionally, ACC
with LSF may not work properly under certain
conditions.
2 ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations
P. 427

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations

1ACC with LSF Conditions and Limitations

The system may automatically shut off and the ACC indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the ACC functions.

The radar sensor for ACC with LSF is shared with the
collision mitigation braking systemTM (CMBSTM).
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) * P. 465

2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420

■ Environmental conditions
• Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).

* Not available on all models

Continued

If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
• The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
• You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
• Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

Driving

■ Vehicle conditions
• The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (Wrong size, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• The parking brake is applied.
• When the lower bumper next to the fog light is dirty.
• When the front of the vehicle tilts up due to heavy cargo in the trunk or rear seats.
• When tire chains are installed.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).

427

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

428 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ Detection limitations

Driving

428

• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved or winding or undulating road that makes it difficult
for the sensor to properly detect a vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the vehicle ahead of you brakes suddenly.
• When the vehicle ahead of you has a unique shape.
• When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on one edge of the lane.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed

Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+ or –/SET button on the
steering wheel.
To increase speed

If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower
than your increased set speed, ACC with LSF may not
accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set
interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

To decrease speed

Continued

Driving

• Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
• If you keep pressing the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

429

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

430 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Set or Change Following Interval
Press the (interval) button to change the
ACC with LSF following interval.
Each time you press the button, the followinginterval (the interval behind a vehicle detected
ahead of you) setting cycles through extra
long, long, middle, and short following
intervals.
Interval Button

Driving

430

Determine the most appropriate followinginterval setting based on your specific driving
conditions. Be sure to adhere to any
following-interval requirements set by local
regulation.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

431 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

The higher your vehicle’s following-speed is, the longer the short, middle, long or
extra long following interval becomes. See the following examples for your
reference.
When the Set Speed is:
Following Interval
65 mph (104 km/h)

Short

83 feet
25 meters
1.1 sec

100 feet
31 meters
1.1 sec

Middle

110 feet
33 meters
1.5 sec

137 feet
42 meters
1.5 sec

Long

154 feet
47 meters
2.1 sec

200 feet
61 meters
2.1 sec

Extra
Long

204 feet
62 meters
2.8 sec

265 feet
81 meters
2.8 sec

Driving

50 mph (80 km/h)

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has
stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with LSF
interval setting.

Continued

431

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Cancel

1To Cancel

CANCEL
Button

MAIN
Button

Driving

432

To cancel ACC with LSF, do any of the
following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
u ACC with LSF indicator goes off.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u When the LSF function has stopped the
vehicle, you cannot cancel ACC with LSF
by depressing the brake pedal.

Resuming the prior set speed: After you have
canceled ACC with LSF, you can resume the prior set
speed while it is still displayed. Press the RES/+
button.
The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC
with LSF has been turned off using the MAIN button.
Press the MAIN button to activate the system, then
set the desired speed.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

1Automatic cancellation
Even though ACC with LSF has been automatically
canceled, you can still resume the prior set speed.
Wait until the condition that caused ACC with LSF to
cancel improves, then press the –/SET button.

Driving

■ Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when
ACC with LSF is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC
with LSF to automatically cancel:
• Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When the radar sensor in the lower bumper next to the fog light gets dirty.
• The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding.
• Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods.
• Abrupt steering wheel movement.
• When the ABS, VSA® or CMBSTM is activated.
• When the ABS or VSA® system indicator comes on.
• When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope.
• When you manually apply the parking brake.
• When the detected vehicle within the ACC with LSF range is too close to your
vehicle.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
The ACC with LSF automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following
causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary.
• The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes.
• The engine is turned off.

Continued

433

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
ACC with
LSF ON

Cruise
Control ON

Press and hold the (interval) button for one
second. Cruise Mode Selected appears on
the driver information interface for two
seconds, and then the mode switches to
Cruise.
To switch back to ACC with LSF, press and
hold the button again for one second. ACC
Mode Selected appears on the driver
information interface for two seconds.

■ When to use
Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h) ~.
Driving

■ To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the –/SET button when you reach the desired
speed.
The moment you release the –/SET button, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control
begins. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on.
During cruise control, Straight Driving Assist Function is activated. This control
function is an EPS function and it helps reduce the steering effort to keep the
steering angle on a straight road with cants.

434

1To Switch ACC with LSF to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you
are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist
you to maintain a following interval from a vehicle
ahead of you.

uuWhen DrivinguAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (LSF) *

■ To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Each time you press the RES/+ or –/SET button, the vehicle speed is increased or
decreased by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
If you keep the RES/+ or –/SET button pressed, the vehicle speed increases or
decreases until you release it. This speed is then set.

■ To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following:
• Press the CANCEL button.
• Press the MAIN button.
• Depress the brake pedal.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator goes off.

1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed:
After cruise control has been canceled, you can still
resume the prior set speed by pressing the RES/+
button while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40
km/h) or more.

At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise
control canceled automatically.

Driving

You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
• When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h)
• When the MAIN button is turned off.

435

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *

Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
Alerts and helps to assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle
unintentionally crossing over detected lane markings.

■ How the System Works
The front camera behind the rearview mirror
monitors left and right lane markings (in white
or yellow). If your vehicle is getting too close
to detected lane markings without a turn
signal activated, the system, in addition to a
visual alert, applies steering torque and alerts
you with rapid vibrations on the steering
wheel, to help you remain within the detected
lane.
Driving

As a visual alert, the Lane Departure
message appears on the driver information
interface.
If the system determines that its steering input
is insufficient to keep your vehicle on the
roadway, it may apply braking.
u Braking is applied only when the lane
markings are solid continuous lines.
The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid
crossing over detected lane markings.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system
beeps to alert you.

436

* Not available on all models

1Road Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *
Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, the RDM system has
limitations.
Over-reliance on the RDM system may result in a
collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the
vehicle within your driving lane.
The RDM system only alerts you when lane drift is
detected without a turn signal in use. The RDM
system may not detect all lane markings or lane
departures; accuracy will vary based on weather,
speed and lane marker condition. It is always your
responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid
collisions.
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420
The RDM system may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 RDM Conditions and Limitations P. 438
There are times when you may not notice RDM
functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or
road surface conditions. If the Lane Departure
message appears repeatedly and you do not apply
responsive actions, the system beeps and cancels
RDM functions.

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *

■ How the System Activates

1How the System Activates

The system becomes ready to start searching for lane markings when all the
following conditions are met:
• The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.
• The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.

■ RDM On and Off

RDM system function can be impacted when the
vehicle is:
• Not driven within a traffic lane.
• Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
• Driven in a narrow lane.

1RDM On and Off
When you have selected Warning Only from the
customized options using the audio/information
screen, the system does not operate the steering
wheel and braking.

Driving

Press the RDM button to turn the system on
and off.
u The indicator in the button comes on and
the message appears on the driver
information interface when the system is
on.

Indicator

The RDM system may automatically shut off and the
indicator comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 76

RDM Button

Continued

437

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

438 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *

■ RDM Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings and the position of your vehicle
under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.

■ Environmental conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Driving

438

Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

439 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguRoad Departure Mitigation (RDM) System *

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast).
• Driving on a road with temporary lane markings.
• Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.
• The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines (e.g., such as at an intersection
or crosswalk).
• The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
• The vehicle in front of you is driving near the lane lines.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.
• Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces.
• When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
lines (or yellow lines).
• Driving on roads with double lines.
Driving

■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong sized, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
• When tire chains are installed.

439

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and
provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

■ Steering input assist
The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left
and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets
closer to either of the lane lines.
■ LKAS camera
Monitors the
lane lines

■ Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel
and a warning display alert you that
the vehicle is drifting out of a detected
lane.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *
Important Safety Reminders
The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not a
substitute for your vehicle control. The system does
not work if you take your hands off the steering
wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
2 Driver Information Interface Warning and
Information Messages * P. 94
Do not place objects on the instrument panel.
Objects may reflect on the front windshield and
prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

Driving

LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected
without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect
all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will
vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker
condition.
It is always your responsibility to safely operate the
vehicle and avoid collisions.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on freeways.

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and
resumes after the signals are off.
() If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS
alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

440

* Not available on all models

The LKAS may not work properly or may work
improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 445
You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ Lane Keep Support Function

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle
nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become
stronger.

The LKAS may not function as designed while driving
in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with
sharp curves.
When it fails to detect lanes, the system will
temporarily be canceled. When lane is detected,
system will recover automatically.

When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering
wheel vibration as well as a warning display.

Driving

■ Lane Departure Warning Function

Warning Area

* Not available on all models

Continued

441

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met.
• The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane.
• The vehicle speed is between 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h).
• You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road.
• The turn signals are off.
• The brake pedal is not depressed.
• The wipers are not in continuous operation.

■ How to activate the system

MAIN Button

1. Press the MAIN button.
u The LKAS is on in the driver information
interface.
The system is ready to use.

Driving
LKAS Button

442

2. Press the LKAS button.
u Lane outlines appear on the driver
information interface.
The system is activated.

1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either the left or right lane
line due to the system applying torque, turn off the
LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

3. Keep your vehicle near the center of the
lane while driving.
u The dotted outer lines change to solid
ones once the system starts operating
after detecting the left and right lane
markings.

■ To cancel

The LKAS temporarily deactivates when it fails to
detect lane lines. When the system detects the lines
again, it comes back on automatically.

1To cancel
Pressing the MAIN button also turns ACC with LSF
on and off.

To cancel the LKAS:
Press the MAIN or LKAS button.

Driving

The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the
engine, even if you turned it on the last time
you drove the vehicle.

MAIN Button

1When the System can be Used

LKAS Button

Continued

443

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

444 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ The system operation is suspended if
you:
• Set the wipers to continuous operation.
u Turning the wipers off resumes the
LKAS.
Models with automatic intermittent wipers

When the LKAS is suspended,
the lane lines on the driver
information interface change to
contour lines, and the beeper
sounds (if activated).

• Set the wiper switch to AUTO and the
wipers operate continuously.
u The LKAS resumes when the wipers stop
or operate intermittently.
All models

Driving

• Decrease the vehicle speed to 40 mph (64
km/h) or less.
u Increasing the vehicle speed to 45 mph
(72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.
• Depress the brake pedal.
u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting
the lane lines again once you release the
brake pedal.

■ The LKAS may automatically be suspended when:
• The system fails to detect lane lines.
• The steering wheel is quickly turned.
• You fail to steer the vehicle.
• The vehicle runs on a curved road over the speed limit.
Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.

444

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

445 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

■ The LKAS may automatically be canceled when:
• The camera temperature gets extremely high or low.
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
• When driving through a sharp curve.
• When driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h).
• When the ABS or VSA systems engage.
A beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

■ LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in
the middle of a lane under certain conditions, including the following:

■ Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes between light and dark, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Shadows of adjacent objects are parallel to lane markings.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as lane markers.
Reflections on the interior of the front windshield.

Continued

Driving

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

445

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

446 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) *

446

■ Vehicle conditions
• Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
• The outside of the windshield is streaked or blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet
snow, etc.
• The inside of the windshield is fogged.
• The camera temperature gets too high.
• An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong size, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
• The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), System
Helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than
what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does
so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

■ VSA® Operation
VSA® System
Indicator

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the
engine does not respond to the accelerator.
You may also notice some noise from the
hydraulic system. You will also see the
indicator blink.

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
VSA® may not function properly if tire types and sizes
are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type
of tire, and the air pressures are as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, there may be a problem with the
system. While this may not interfere with normal
driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.
The VSA® indicator may come on after re-connecting
the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12
mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does
not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Driving

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations
and does not control the entire braking system. You
still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate
for the conditions and always leave a sufficient
margin of safety.
The main function of the VSA® system is generally
known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The
system also includes a traction control function.

Continued

447

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

■ VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF
Indicator

This button is on the driver side control panel.
To partially disable VSA® functionality/
features, press and hold it until you hear a
beep.
The traction control stops fully functioning,
allowing the wheels to spin more freely at low
speed. The VSA® OFF indicator will also come
on and a message on the driver information
interface * informs you that the mode is
changed.

Driving

To restore VSA® functionality/features, press
the
(VSA® OFF) button until you hear a
beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the
engine, even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.

1Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), System
With the
button pressed, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability, but VSA®
traction and stability enhancement becomes less
effective.
In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets
stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the
button pressed.
When the
button is pressed, the traction control
function becomes less effective. This allows for the
wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should
only attempt to free your vehicle with the
button
pressed if you are not able to free it without.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to
press the
button again. We do not recommend
driving your vehicle with the
button pressed
(indicator on).
You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.
The VSA® OFF indicator may come on after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at
more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should
go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

448

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

Agile Handling Assist
Lightly brakes selective wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and
helps support the vehicle’s stability and performance during cornering.

1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in
all driving situations. You still need to drive and
corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and
always leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays
on while driving, the agile handling assist does not
activate.
You may hear a sound coming from the engine
compartment while the agile handling assist is
activated. This is normal.

Driving

449

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

LaneWatchTM *
LaneWatch is an assistance system that allows you to check the passenger side rear
areas displayed on the audio/information screen when the turn signal is activated to
the passenger’s side. A camera in the passenger side door mirror monitors these
areas and allows you to check for vehicles, in addition to your visual check and use
of the passenger door mirror. You can also keep the system on for your convenience
while driving.
1

The system activates when you:

Move the turn signal
lever to the passenger
side.

Press the LaneWatch
button.

The passenger side view
display appears on the
audio/information screen.

1LaneWatchTM *

3 WARNING
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to
change lanes before doing so may result in
a crash and serious injury or death.
Do not rely only on LaneWatch while
driving.
Always look in your mirrors, to either side
of your vehicle, and behind you for other
vehicles before changing lanes.

Driving

Important Safety Reminder
Like all assistance systems, LaneWatch has
limitations. Over reliance on LaneWatch may result in
a collision.

The system deactivates when you press
the LaneWatch button again.

The LaneWatch function can be affected by weather,
lighting (including headlights and low sun angle),
ambient darkness, camera condition, and loading.

Camera

Audio/Information Screen

450

* Not available on all models

The LaneWatch may not provide the intended display
of traffic to the side and rear under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle’s suspension has been altered,
changing the height of the vehicle.
• Your tires are over or under inflated.
• Your tires or wheels are of varied size or
construction.

uuWhen DrivinguLaneWatchTM *

■ Customizing the LaneWatch settings
You can customize the following items using the audio/information screen.
• Show with Turn Signal: Selects whether LaneWatch monitor comes on when
you operate the turn signal light lever.
• Display Time after Turn Signal Off: Changes the length of time the LaneWatch
display stays on after you pull the turn signal lever back.
• Reference Lines: Selects whether the reference lines appear on the LaneWatch
monitor.
• Display: Allows for display adjustments of items, such as brightness, contrast and
black level. This setting is part of the System setup group.
2 Customized Features P. 308

■ Reference Lines

2
1

The LaneWatch camera view is restricted. Its unique
lens makes objects on the screen look slightly
different from what they are.
LaneWatch display does not come on when the shift
lever is in (R .
For proper LaneWatch operation:
• The camera is located in the passenger side door
mirror. Always keep this area clean. If the camera
lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft,
moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.
• Do not cover the camera lens with labels or stickers
of any kind.
• Do not touch the camera lens.
1Reference Lines

Three lines that appear on the screen can give
an idea of how far the vehicles or objects on
the screen are from your vehicle, respectively.
If an object is near line 1 (in red), it indicates
that it is close to your vehicle whereas an
object near line 3 farther away.

The area around the reference line 1 (red) is very close to
your vehicle. As always, make sure to visually confirm
the safety of a lane change before changing lanes.

Driving

1LaneWatchTM *

The distance between your vehicle and lines 1, 2 and
3 on the screen vary depending on road conditions
and vehicle loading. For example, the reference lines
on the screen may seem to appear closer than the
actual distances when the rear of your vehicle is more
heavily loaded.
Consult a dealer if:
• The passenger side door mirror, or area around it is
severely impacted, resulting in changing the
camera angle.
• The LaneWatch display does not come on at all.

* Not available on all models

451

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

U.S. models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

The system does not monitor the tires when driving
at low speed.

■ TPMS Calibration

Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
• Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
• Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather.
The low tire pressure indicator will not come on as a
result of over inflation.

You must start TPMS calibration every time you:
• Adjust the pressure in one or more tires.
• Rotate the tires.
• Replace one or more tires.

Driving

Before calibrating the TPMS:
• Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 522

Make sure:
• The vehicle is at a complete stop.
Manual transmission models

• The shift lever is in (N .
Continuously variable transmission models

• The shift lever is in (P .
All models

• The ignition switch is in ON (w *1.
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

452

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle
monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each
wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are
significantly under-inflated. This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to
come on and a message to appear on the driver information interface *.

* Not available on all models

Conditions such as low ambient temperature and
altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can
trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and
size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and
type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 522
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
with a delay or may not come on at all when:
• You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
• You drive on snowy or slippery roads.
• Snow chains are used.
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
• A compact spare tire is used.
• There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires,
such as when towing a trailer, than the condition at
calibration.
• Snow chains are used.

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Low Tire Pressure/
TPMS Indicator
TPMS
Button

Models with information display

1TPMS Calibration

Press and hold the TPMS button until the low
tire pressure/TPMS indicator blinks twice,
indicating the calibration process has begun.
• If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator does
not blink, confirm the above conditions
then press and hold the TPMS button again.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.
Models with color audio system
Models with driver information interface

installed.

• The calibration process requires approximately 30
minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between
30-65 mph (48-105 km/h).
• During calibration, if the ignition is turned off then
on again, and the vehicle is not moved within 45
seconds, the low tire pressure indicator may come
on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the
calibration process is not yet complete.
If the snow chains are installed, remove them before
calibrating the TPMS.
If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even
when the properly inflated specified regular tires are
installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
We recommend that the tires be replaced with the
same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a
dealer for details.

Driving

You can calibrate the system from the customized
features on the driver information interface.
1. Press the
then 3 / 4 button to select
(Vehicle Settings), then press the
ENTER button.
u TPMS Calibration appears on the display.
2. Press the ENTER button.
u The display switches to the
customization setup screen, where you
can select Cancel or Calibrate.
3. Press the 3 / 4 button and select
Calibrate, then press the ENTER button.
u Calibration Started screen appears,
then the display returns to the
customization menu screen.

• TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
after re-connecting the battery. Drive a short distance
at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should
go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a
dealer.

• If the Calibration Failed to Start message
appears, repeat steps 2-3.
• The calibration process finishes automatically.
Continued

453

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

454 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Models with Display Audio

You can calibrate the system from the
customized feature on the audio/information
screen.
1. Select
.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Vehicle.
4. Select TPMS Calibration.
5. Select Cancel or Calibrate.
u When the calibration is complete, the
display returns to the customization
menu screen.

Driving

454

• If the Calibration Failed To Start.
message appears, repeat steps 3-5.
• The calibration process finishes
automatically.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

455 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

U.S. models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required
Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale
Driving

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability.
Continued

455

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

456 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

Driving

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.

456

Braking
Brake System
■ Parking Brake

1Parking Brake

Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the
parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.
■ To apply
The electric parking brake can be applied any
time the vehicle has battery, no matter which
position the ignition switch*1 is in.

Electric Parking
Brake Switch

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently
and securely.
u The parking brake indicator comes on.

Electric Parking
Brake Switch

Manually releasing the parking brake using
the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and
smoothly when facing down hill on steep hills.

The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric
parking brake system operation when you apply or
release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the
battery goes dead.
2 Jump Starting P. 555
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake
switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels
are applied by the VSA system until the vehicle
come to a stop. The electric parking brake then
applies, and the switch should be released.
In the following situations, the parking brake
automatically operates.
• When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your
vehicle is stopped and the brake hold system is applied.
• When the engine is turned off while the brake hold
system is applied.
• When there is a problem with the brake hold
system while brake hold is applied.

Driving

■ To release
The vehicle must be ON (w *1 in order to
release the electric parking brake.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The parking brake indicator goes off.

You may hear the electric parking brake system
operating from the rear wheel area when you apply
or release the parking brake. This is normal.

Models with ACC with LSF

• When the vehicle is stops more than 10 minutes
while ACC with LSF is activated.

• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened while your
vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with LSF.

• When the engine is turned off while ACC with LSF
is activated.

Manual transmission models

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

• When there is a problem with the electric parking brake

switch, after you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.

457

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ To release automatically

1Parking Brake

Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the
vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Continuously variable transmission models

Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake.
Manual transmission models

Depress the accelerator pedal while releasing the clutch pedal releases the parking
brake.
Continuously variable transmission models

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
u The parking brake indicator goes off.

Driving

Accelerator Pedal

458

When the vehicle is travelling uphill, the accelerator
pedal may need to be pressed farther to
automatically release the electric parking brake.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Malfunction indicator lamp
• Transmission indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically
while the following indicators are on:
• Brake system indicator
• VSA® system indicator
• ABS indicator
• Supplemental restraint system indicator

Accelerator Pedal
Clutch Pedal

If the parking brake cannot be released
automatically, release it manually.

Manual transmission models

Gently depress the accelerator pedal and
release the clutch pedal.
u The parking brake indicator goes off.

Manual transmission models

The clutch pedal is fully depressed before gently
depress the accelerator pedal and release the clutch
pedal.

uuBrakinguBrake System

The parking brake automatically releases as you depress the accelerator pedal when:
• You are wearing the driver’s seat belt.
• The engine is running.
Continuously variable transmission models

• The transmission is not in (P or (N .

1Foot Brake

Manual transmission models

Check the brakes after driving through deep water,
or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If
necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the
pedal several times.

• The transmission is not in (N .

■ Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist
helps to reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system
increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an
emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering
control when braking very hard.

Driving

2 Brake Assist System P. 464
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 463

If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when
applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear
indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates
that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the
vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an
occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply
the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by
high frequency vibration of the brake pads against
the rotating brake disc.
Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a
long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake
effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your
foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a
lower gear/speed position. With manual transmission
use a lower gear for greater engine braking.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause
them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad
life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Continued

459

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ Automatic Brake Hold

1Automatic Brake Hold

3 WARNING

Continuously variable transmission models

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is
pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at
traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

■ Turning on the system

■ Activating the system

Goes
Off

U.S.
Automatic Brake
Hold Button
Driving

460

Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
● The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.

Brake Pedal

■ Canceling the system

On
Canada

Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop. The shift lever must
not be in (P or (R .
● The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
● Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.

Accelerator Pedal

Depress the accelerator
pedal while the shift
lever is in a position
other than (P or (N . The
brake hold is disengaged
and the vehicle starts to
move.
● The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
releases the brake
automatically.

Activating the automatic brake hold system
on steep hills or slippery roads may still
allow the vehicle to move if you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold
system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from
moving when stopped on a steep hill or
slippery roads.

3 WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to
park the vehicle may result in the vehicle
unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may
cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or
death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is
temporarily kept by automatic brake hold
and always park the vehicle by putting the
transmission in (P and applying the parking
brake.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

461 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBrakinguBrake System

Manual transmission models

Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until you change a gear to a
position other than (N and:
• Release the clutch pedal on a level road or when facing downhill.
• Release the clutch pedal and depress the accelerator pedal when facing uphill.
You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights
and in heavy traffic.

■ Turning on the system

■ Activating the system

On
On
U.S.

Automatic Brake
Hold Button

On
Canada

Depress the brake pedal
to come to a complete
stop.
● The automatic brake
hold indicator comes
on. Braking is kept for
up to 10 minutes.
● Release the brake pedal
after the automatic
brake hold indicator
comes on.

Clutch Pedal
On
Goes
Off

Accelerator Pedal
Shift into one of the
gears other than (N and:
● Release the clutch
pedal on a level road
or when facing
downhill.
● Release the clutch
pedal and depress the
accelerator pedal
when facing uphill.
The system is canceled
and the vehicle starts to
move.
● The automatic brake
hold indicator goes off.
The system releases the
brake automatically.
Continued

Driving

Fasten your seat belt
properly, then start the
engine. Press the
automatic brake hold
button.
● The automatic brake
hold system indicator
comes on. The system
is turned on.

Brake Pedal

■ Canceling the system

461

uuBrakinguBrake System

■ The system automatically cancels when:
• You engage the parking brake.
Continuously variable transmission models

• You depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to (P or (R .
All models

Under the following conditions, the system automatically cancels, and the parking
brake is applied:
• Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes.
• The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• The engine is turned off.
• There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.
• The battery is disconnected.

1Automatic Brake Hold
While the system is activated, you can turn off the
engine or park the vehicle through the same
procedure as you normally do.
2 When Stopped P. 473
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated,
the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is
off.
Manual transmission models

The system turns off if the engine stalls while
automatic brake hold is active or the system is on.

Manual transmission models

Driving

• The engine stalls.

■ Turning off the automatic brake hold system

Goes
Off

Automatic Brake
Hold Button

462

While the system is on, press the automatic
brake hold button again.
u The automatic brake hold system
indicator goes off.
If you want to turn off automatic brake hold
while the system is in operation, press the
automatic brake hold button with the brake
pedal depressed.

1Turning on the system
Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold
system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves
while the automatic brake hold system is in
operation.

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
■ ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by
pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also
balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as
“stomp and steer.”

When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

NOTICE

The ABS may not function correctly if you use an
incorrect tire type and size.
When the ABS indicator comes on while driving,
there may be a problem with the system.
While normal braking is not affected, there is a
possibility of the ABS not operating. Have the vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes
to stop the vehicle. It only helps with steering control
during hard braking.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more
stopping distance than a vehicle without the ABS:
• When driving on rough road surfaces, including
when driving on uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow.
• When snow chains are installed.

Driving

■ ABS operation
The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Keep holding the
pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very
hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately
if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

You may hear a motor sound coming from the
engine compartment while system checks are being
performed immediately after starting the engine or
while driving. This is normal.

463

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

464 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Brake Assist System
■ Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress
the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.

■ Brake assist system operation
Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise
may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

Driving

464

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Can assist you when there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or a
pedestrian detected in front of yours. The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when a
potential collision is determined, as well as to reduce your vehicle speed to help
minimize collision severity when a collision is deemed unavoidable.

■ How the system works
When to use

The camera is located
behind the rearview
mirror.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
Important Safety Reminder
The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an
unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collision nor
stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your
responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering
wheel appropriately according to the driving
conditions.
The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a
vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain
conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 469

Be careful not to have the radar sensor cover strongly
impacted.

The radar sensor is in
the lower bumper
next to the fog light.

Driving

You can read about handling information for the
camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420

1How the system works

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about
3 mph (5 km/h) and there is a vehicle in front of you.
The CMBSTM activates when:
● The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian detected
in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a
collision.
● Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and there is a chance of a
collision with an oncoming detected vehicle or a pedestrian in front of you.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel alert you
when your vehicle speed is between 19 and 62 mph
(30 and 100 km/h) with an oncoming vehicle
detected in front of you.
When the CMBSTM activates, it may automatically
apply the brake. It will be canceled when your vehicle
stops or a potential collision is not determined.

465

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ When the system activates

1When the system activates

The system provides visual, audible and tactile alerts of a possible collision, and
stops if the collision is avoided.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.)
Audible Alert

Visual Alerts

The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect
pedestrians.
However, this pedestrian detection feature may not
activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of
your vehicle under certain conditions.
Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection
limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 469

Beep

Driving

Tactile Alert

At system’s earliest collision alert stage, you can change the distance (Long/
Normal/Short) between vehicles at which alerts will come on through driver
information interface */audio/information screen * setting options.
2 List of customizable options P. 121

■ Vibration alert on the steering wheel
When a potential collision to an oncoming detected vehicle is determined, the
system alerts you with rapid vibration on the steering wheel, in addition to visual and
audible alerts.
u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, operate the
steering wheel, etc.).

466

* Not available on all models

1Vibration alert on the steering wheel
Vibration alert function is disabled when the electric
power steering (EPS) system indicator comes on.
2 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator P. 82

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

467 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of
the stages before initiating the last stage.
CMBSTM
Distance between vehicles

Stage
one

Normal
Long Short

Vehicle
Ahead

The radar sensor
detects a vehicle
There is a risk of a
collision with the
vehicle ahead of you.

Your Vehicle

Your
Vehicle

Vehicle
Ahead

When in Long, visual and audible alerts
come on at a longer distance from a
vehicle ahead than in Normal setting,
and in Short, at a shorter distance than
in Normal.

Stage
three

Vehicle
Ahead

In case of an
oncoming vehicle
detected, rapid
vibration is
provided.

The risk of a collision
has increased, time to
respond is reduced.
The CMBSTM
determines that a
collision is
unavoidable.

Braking

—

Lightly
applied
Visual and audible alerts.

Your
Vehicle

Steering Wheel

Driving

Stage
two

Audible & Visual WARNINGS

—
Forcefully
applied

Continued

467

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ CMBSTM On and Off

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

Press this button until the beeper sounds to
switch the system on or off.
When the CMBSTM is off:
• The CMBSTM indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
• A message on the driver information
interface reminds you that the system is off.
The CMBSTM is in the previously selected ON or
OFF setting each time you start the engine.

Driving

468

* Not available on all models

The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the
CMBSTM indicator will come and stay on under certain
conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 469
The CMBSTM indicator may come on after reconnecting the battery.
Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/
h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

1CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations

The system may automatically shut off and the CMBSTM indicator will come on under
certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other
conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Sensor Camera * P. 420

■ Environmental conditions
Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
Sudden changes in ambient light, such as an entrance or exit of a tunnel.
There is little contrast between objects and the background.
Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
Driving in the shadows of trees, buildings, etc.
Roadway objects or structures are misinterpreted as vehicles and pedestrians.
Reflections on the interior of the windshield.

■ Roadway conditions
• Driving on a snowy or wet roadway (obscured lane marking, vehicle tracks,
reflected lights, road spray, high contrast on a snowy or wet roadway).
• Driving on curvy, winding, or undulating roads.
• The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill.

* Not available on all models

Continued

If you need the radar sensor to be repaired, or
removed, or the radar sensor cover is strongly
impacted, turn off the system by pressing the
CMBSTM off button and take your vehicle to a dealer.

Driving

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor cover or
replace the radar sensor cover.

469

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

470 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ Vehicle conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Headlight lenses are dirty or the headlights are not properly adjusted.
The outside of the windshield is blocked by dirt, mud, leaves, wet snow, etc.
The inside of the windshield is fogged.
An abnormal tire or wheel condition (wrong size, varied size or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.).
When tire chains are installed.
The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load or suspension modifications.
The camera temperature gets too high.
Driving with the parking brake applied.
When the radar sensor in the lower bumper gets dirty.

■ Detection limitations

Driving

470

• A vehicle or pedestrian suddenly crosses in front of you.
• The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you is
too short.
• A vehicle cuts in front of you at a slow speed, and it brakes suddenly.
• When you accelerate rapidly and approach the vehicle or pedestrian ahead of you
at high speed.
• The vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, bicycle, mobility scooter or other small
vehicle.
• When there are animals in front of your vehicle.
• When you drive on a curved, winding or undulating road that makes it difficult for
the sensor to properly detect a vehicle in front of you.
• The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle or pedestrian in front of
you is significantly large.
• An oncoming vehicle suddenly comes in front of you.
• Another vehicle suddenly comes in front of you at an intersection, etc.
• Your vehicle abruptly crosses over in front of an oncoming vehicle.
• When driving through a narrow iron bridge.
• When the lead vehicle suddenly slows down.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

471 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

Limitations applicable to pedestrian detection only

• When there is a group of people in front of your vehicle walking together side by
side.
• Surrounding conditions or belongings of the pedestrian alter the pedestrian’s
shape, preventing the system from recognizing that the person is a pedestrian.
• When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height.
• When a pedestrian blends in with the background.
• When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, or when their hands are raised or
they are running.
• When several pedestrians are walking ahead in a group.
• When the camera cannot correctly identify that a pedestrian is present due to an
unusual shape (holding luggage, body position, size).

Driving

■ Automatic shutoff
The CMBS may automatically shut itself off and the CMBS indicator comes and stays
on when:
• The temperature inside the system is high.
• You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period.
• An abnormal tire condition is detected (wrong tire size, flat tire, etc.).
• The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty.
Once the conditions that caused the CMBS to shut off improve or are addressed
(e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

Continued

471

uuBrakinguCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *

■ With Little Chance of a Collision
The CMBSTM may activate even when you are aware of a vehicle ahead of you, or
when there is no vehicle ahead. Some examples of this are:

■ When Passing
Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to pass.

■ At an intersection
Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right turn.

■ On a curve
When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
Driving

■ Through a low bridge at high speed
You drive under a low or narrow bridge at high speed.

■ Speed bumps, road work sites, train tracks, roadside objects, etc.
You drive over speed bumps, steel road plates, etc., or your vehicle approaches train
tracks or roadside objects (such as a traffic sign and guard rail) on a curve or, when
parking, stationary vehicles and walls.

472

* Not available on all models

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *
For the CMBSTM to work properly:
Always keep the radar sensor cover clean.
Never use chemical solvents or polishing powder for
cleaning the sensor cover. Clean it with water or a
mild detergent.
Do not paint, or apply any coverings or paint to the
radar sensor area. This can impact CMBS operation.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any
unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning
message appears too frequently).
If the front of the vehicle is impacted in any of the
following situations, the radar sensor may not work
properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer:
• The vehicle mounted onto a bump, curb, chock,
embankment, etc.
• You drive the vehicle where the water is deep.
• Your vehicle has a frontal collision.

Parking Your Vehicle
When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully.
Continuously variable transmission models

1Parking Your Vehicle
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, oil, or timber.
Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

3. Move the shift lever from (D to (P .
Manual transmission models

3. Move the shift lever to (R or (1 .
All models

4. Turn off the engine.
u The electric parking brake indicator goes off in about 15 seconds.
Always confirm the electric parking brake is set, in particular if you are parked on an
incline.

1When Stopped
NOTICE
Continuously variable transmission models

The following can damage the transmission:
• Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
• Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
• Moving the shift lever into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Driving

In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake
may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are
expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if
parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so
they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the
slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from
moving. If you do not take either precaution, the
vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

473

Multi-View Rear Camera
About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle’s rear view.
The display automatically changes to a rear view when the shift lever is moved to (R .

■ Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area
Wide View Mode
Guidelines

Normal View Mode
Bumper
Driving

Camera
Approx. 20 inches (50 cm)
Approx. 39 inches (1 m)
Approx. 79 inches (2 m)

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see
the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath
the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects
appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing
up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and
high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do
not rely on the rearview display which does not give
you all information about conditions at the back of
your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture,
use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free
of debris.
Models with Display Audio

Top Down View Mode

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic
Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 308

Approx. 118 inches (3 m)
Fixed Guideline
On: Guidelines appear when you shift into (R .
Off: Guidelines do not appear.
Dynamic Guidelines
On: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel
direction.
Off: Guidelines do not move.

474

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

475 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera

You can view three different camera angles on the rearview display.
Models with color audio system

Press the LIST/SELECT (selector) knob to switch the angle.
Models with Display Audio

Touch the appropriate icon to switch the angle.
: Wide view
: Normal view
: Top down view
All models

Driving

• If the last used viewing mode was Wide or Normal, the same mode is selected the
next time you shift into (R .
• If Top View was last used before you turned off the engine, Wide mode is
selected next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 and shift to (R .
• If Top View was last used more than 10 seconds after you shift from (R , Wide
mode is selected the next time you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

475

Refueling
Fuel Information
■ Fuel recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise
that can lead to engine damage.

■ Top tier detergent gasoline
Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda
endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help
maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive
manufacturers to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines.

Driving

Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met
“TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards at the retail location. This fuel is
guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic
additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic
additives in gasoline, help avoid build-up of deposits in your engine and emission
control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on
gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit
www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top
tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

■ Fuel tank capacity: 12.39 US gal (46.9 liters)

476

1Fuel Information
NOTICE

We recommend quality gasoline containing
detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and
engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain
good performance, fuel economy, and emissions
control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline
that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is
available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely
affect performance, and cause the malfunction
indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on.
If this happens, contact a dealer for service.
Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such
as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on
oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.
If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try
another service station or switch to another brand of
gasoline.

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel
Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle
directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler
nozzle.
1. Stop your vehicle with the service station
pump on the left side of the vehicle in the
rear.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Press the area indicated by the arrow to
release the fuel fill door. You will hear a
Press
click.
u Driver’s door must be unlocked.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Inside P. 140

1How to Refuel

3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive.
You can be burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
• Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks,
and flame away.
• Handle fuel only outdoors.
• Wipe up spills immediately.

Driving

The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only
service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of
smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon
fuel for other uses) or other non-service station
devices can damage the area in and around the filler
opening.
Use the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill
door.
The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically
relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can
be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the
driver’s door.
The fuel fill door and its latching mechanism can be
permanently damaged if the fuel fill door is forced
closed when the driver’s door is locked.

Continued

477

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

4. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the
lower part of filler opening, then insert it
slowly and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the filler
nozzle goes down along with the filler
pipe.
u Keep the filler nozzle level.
u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will
click off automatically.
u After filling, wait about five seconds
before removing the filler nozzle.
5. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

Driving

478

1How to Refuel
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in
the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result
of changes in air temperature.
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is
not full, there may be a problem with the pump’s fuel
vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If
this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
Do not continue to add fuel after the nozzle has
automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed
the full tank capacity.
If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
P. 574

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2
Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several
factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and
vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the
rated fuel economy of this vehicle.

■ Maintenance and Fuel Economy

* Not available on all models

Direct calculation is the recommended method to
determine actual fuel consumed while driving.
Miles driven

Gallons of
fuel

Miles per
Gallon

100

Liters of
fuel

Kilometers
driven

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are
established following a simulated test. For more
information on how this test is performed, please visit
http://oee.nrcan.gc.ca/

Driving

You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the
information display */driver information interface *.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil, displaying the API Certification Seal.
• Maintain the specified tire pressure.
• Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo.
• Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.

1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions

479

Turbo Engine Vehicle *
Handling Precautions
The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by
delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by
the engine’s exhaust gas pressure.
• When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid revving the engine or sudden
acceleration.
• Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance
Minder. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its
temperature reaches over 1,292°F (700°C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine
oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or
interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal
noise of the turbine bearing.

Driving

480

* Not available on all models

1Turbo Engine Vehicle *
The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing
the filter is indicated on the driver information
interface. Follow the information of when to replace
them.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 485
The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark
when you restart the engine after driving under high
load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly
terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after
you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance ............ 482
Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 483
Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service...484
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 485
Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 495
Opening the Hood ........................... 497
Recommended Engine Oil ................ 498
Oil Check ......................................... 499
Adding Engine Oil ............................ 501
Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 502
Engine Coolant ................................ 505

* Not available on all models

Transmission Fluid............................ 507
Brake/Clutch * Fluid .......................... 508
Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 509
Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 510
Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades.... 519
Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires ................................. 522
Tire and Loading Information Label ..... 523
Tire Labeling .................................... 523
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)...... 525
Wear Indicators................................ 527
Tire Service Life ................................ 527
Tire and Wheel Replacement............ 528

Tire Rotation.................................... 529
Winter Tires ..................................... 530
Battery............................................... 531
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery ........... 533
Heating System */Climate Control
System * Maintenance .................... 535
Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 536
Exterior Care.................................... 538
Accessories and Modifications
Accessories ...................................... 541
Modifications................................... 542

481

Before Performing Maintenance
Inspection and Maintenance
For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle
in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient
brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.
(Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in
effect.)

■ Types of Inspection and Maintenance
■ Daily inspections
Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when
refueling.

■ Periodic inspections
• Check the brake/clutch * fluid level monthly.
2 Brake/Clutch * Fluid P. 508

• Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 522

• Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
Maintenance

482

2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 510

• Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 519

* Not available on all models

1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
emissions control devices and systems may be
done by any automotive repair establishment or
individuals using parts that are “certified” to
EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to
perform maintenance on the maintenance main
items marked with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all maintenance services should
be performed in accordance with the intervals
indicated by the information display */driver
information interface *.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 487, 492
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks
that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a
subscription to the Service Express website at
www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 587
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make
sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first.
After performing maintenance, update the records in
the separate maintenance booklet.

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here.
However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform
a given task.

■ Maintenance Safety
• To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
• Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood.
u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them causing a fire.
• To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not
gasoline.
• Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or
compressed air.
• Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you.
u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.

• The vehicle must be in a stationary condition.
u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and
the engine is off.
• Be aware that hot parts can burn you.
u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before
touching vehicle parts.
• Be aware that moving parts can injure you.
u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away
from moving parts.

3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or
failing to correct a problem before driving
can cause a crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and
maintenance recommendations according
to the schedules in this owner’s manual.

3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance
instructions and precautions can cause you
to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and
precautions in this owner’s manual.

Maintenance

■ Vehicle Safety

1Safety When Performing Maintenance

483

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

484 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and
servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the
same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

Maintenance

484

Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages
appear on the information display * or the driver information interface * every time
you turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1. The messages notify you when to change
the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance
services.
Models with information display

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
■ Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w .
2. Press the
(TRIP) knob repeatedly until
the engine oil life appears on the
information display.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

Continued

Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0

Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0

Maintenance

The Maintenance Minder indicator ( ) stays
on in the instrument panel after the engine oil
life becomes 0%. Have the indicated
maintenance done by a dealer immediately.

Based on the engine operating conditions and oil
age, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and
displayed as a percentage.

485

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

486 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Information Display
To switch the display, press the
Oil Life Display

(TRIP) knob.
Explanation

Information

When you select the Maintenance
Minder screen, it displays codes for
maintenance items due at the next
engine oil change, along with the
percentage of engine oil life
remaining.

Maintenance

486

Maintenance Minder Indicator

Comes on for a few seconds when
you set the ignition switch to ON,
then goes off.

The engine oil life indicator starts
to appear along with other duesoon maintenance item codes
when the remaining oil life drops
to 15 percent.

The engine oil is approaching the
end of its service life.

The remaining engine oil has
passed its service life, and a
negative distance appears after
driving over 10 miles (U.S. models)
or 10 km (Canadian models). The
negative distance on the display
blinks.

The engine oil life has passed.
The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced
immediately.

Starts to come on when the
remaining engine oil life drops to
15 percent.
It goes off when the display is
switched.

Stays on as a reminder even when
the display is switched.

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).

Maintenance
Minder Indicator

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

Maintenance Minder Message

Main Item

they are noisy.

Sub Items

U.S. models

CODE
A
B

●
●
●
●

*1: If a Maintenance Minder indicator does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
7

●
●

Maintenance

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
• Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots
• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Exhaust system#
• Fuel lines and connections#

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

Continued

487

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Canadian models

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 256,000 km (160,000
miles).

• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.

CODE
A
0

Maintenance

488

●
●

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

*1: If a Maintenance Minder indicator does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
7
9

●
●
●
●

Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2
Replace dust and pollen filter*3
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid*4
Replace spark plugs
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid*5
Service front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
• Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
• Suspension components
• Driveshaft boots
• Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA)
• All fluid levels and condition of fluids
• Exhaust system#
• Fuel lines and connections#

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w and have
the vehicle at a complete stop.
2. Display the Maintenance Minder by
repeatedly pressing the
(TRIP) knob.
3. Press and hold the
knob for 10 seconds
or more.
u The display will blink to show it is in reset
mode.
4. Rotate the
knob to select the item you
wish to reset.
u Reset the selected item by pushing the
knob for five seconds or more.

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE

Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display
after a maintenance service results in the system
showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can
lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM
display after completing the required maintenance
service. If someone other than a dealer performs
maintenance service, reset the Maintenance
MinderTM display yourself.

Maintenance

489

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Models with driver information interface

To Use Maintenance MinderTM

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

■ Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the
engine oil, appear on the driver information interface.
You can view them on the Maintenance Minder screen at any time.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press the
button several times until
is displayed.
3. Press ENTER to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine oil life
appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due
soon.

Engine Oil Life
Maintenance

Main Item

Sub Item

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

490

Displayed Engine Oil
Life (%)
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
15
10
5
0

Calculated Engine Oil
Life (%)
100 to 91
90 to 81
80 to 71
70 to 61
60 to 51
50 to 41
40 to 31
30 to 21
20 to 16
15 to 11
10 to 6
5 to 1
0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you
can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 492

Button
ENTER Button

Based on the engine operating conditions and oil
age, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and
displayed as a percentage.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

491 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information
Interface

Maintenance Message

—

Oil Life Display

Explanation

Information

When you select the Maintenance
Minder screen, it displays codes for
maintenance items due at the next
engine oil change, along with the
percentage of engine oil life
remaining.
The engine oil life indicator starts to The engine oil is approaching the end
of its service life.
appear along with other due-soon
maintenance item codes when the
remaining oil life drops to 15 percent.

Maintenance Due Now

The remaining engine oil life is 5 to 1 The engine oil has almost reached the
percent. Press the
button to
end of its service life, and the
switch to another display.
maintenance items should be
inspected and serviced as soon as
possible.

Maintenance Past Due

The engine oil has passed its service The engine oil life has passed.
life, and a negative distance appears The maintenance items must be
inspected and serviced immediately.
after driving over 10 miles (U.S.
models) or 10 km (Canadian models).
The negative distance on the display
blinks.

The system message indicator (

Maintenance

Maintenance Due Soon

) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.
Continued

491

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Maintenance Service Items
System Message
Indicator

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000
km).

• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if

Maintenance Minder Message

Main Item

they are noisy.

Sub Items

U.S. models

CODE
A
B

●
●
●
●

Maintenance

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

492

CODE
1
2

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
7

●
●

*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 25,000 miles (40,000 km).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Canadian models

1Maintenance Service Items

• Inspect idle speed every 256,000 km (160,000
miles).

• Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.

CODE
A
0

●
●

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

●
●
●
●

3
4

●
●
●

5
7
9

●
●
●
●

Continued

Maintenance

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles).
*4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance
Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed
every 40,000 km (25,000 miles).
*5: If a Maintenance Minder Indicator does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is
reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty.

CODE
1
2

493

uuMaintenance MinderTM uTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

■ Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the
maintenance service.

ENTER Button

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display
using the customized features on the driver
information interface.
2 Customized Features P. 118
(Display/Information) Button
Maintenance

494

1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1.
2. Press the
(display/information) button repeatedly until the
appears.
3. Press the ENTER button.
4. Press and hold the ENTER button for about 10 seconds to enter the reset mode.
5. Press 3 / 4 to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All Due Items
(You can also select Cancel to end the process).
6. Press the ENTER button to reset the selected item.
7. Repeat from step 4 for other items you wish to reset.

Models with Display Audio

You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display
using the audio/information touch screen.
2 Customized Features P. 308

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

495 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
1.5 L engine models

Brake/Clutch * Fluid
(Black Cap)
Engine Oil Fill Cap
U.S. models

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Canadian models

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Battery

Maintenance

Reserve Tank
Reserve Tank Cap
Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)

* Not available on all models

Continued

495

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

496 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood

2.0 L engine models

Engine Oil Dipstick
(Orange)
Engine Oil Fill Cap

Brake/Clutch * Fluid
(Black Cap)

Washer Fluid
(Blue Cap)

Battery

Maintenance
Reserve Tank
Reserve Tank Cap

496

* Not available on all models

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set
the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the
driver’s side lower left corner of the
dashboard.
u The hood will pop up slightly.

1Opening the Hood
NOTICE

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are
raised.
The hood will strike the wipers, and may damage
either the hood or the wipers.

Pull
When closing the hood, check that the hood is
securely latched.

3. Pull up the hood latch lever (located under
the front edge of the hood to the center)
and raise the hood. Once you have raised
the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can
open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch
mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

Lever

Grip

Clamp

When closing, remove the support rod, and
stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the
hood. Remove your hand at a height of
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the
hood close.

Maintenance

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp
using the grip. Mount the support rod in
the hood.

Support Rod

497

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil
• Genuine Honda Motor Oil
• Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the
container.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's
performance and longevity. If you drive the
vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil,
the engine may fail or be damaged.
This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving
and that it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Use Genuine Honda Motor Oil or another
commercial engine oil of suitable viscosity for
the ambient temperature as shown.

Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

■ Synthetic oil
You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal
and is the specified viscosity grade.

498

1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact,
they may adversely affect the engine performance
and durability.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check
We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the
oil.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange).
1.5 L engine models
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or
paper towel.
3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its
hole.

1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly
add oil being careful not to overfill.

2.0 L engine models

Maintenance

Continued

499

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

500 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the
level. It should be between the upper and
lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

1.5 L engine models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
2.0 L engine models

Upper Mark
Lower Mark
Maintenance

500

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil
1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap.
2. Add oil slowly.
3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely.
4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.

1.5 L engine models

Engine Oil
Fill Cap

1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE

Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark.
Overfilling the engine oil can result in leaks and
engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil
may damage the engine compartment components.

2.0 L engine models

Engine Oil
Fill Cap
Maintenance

501

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the
engine’s lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.
Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the
information display */driver information interface *.
1. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature, and then turn the
engine off.
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil
fill cap.
3. Remove the phillips head screws and
slotted head screws by turning 90°
counterclockwise on the undercarriage
and remove the under cover.
Screw

Under Cover

Maintenance

502

* Not available on all models

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE

You may damage the environment if you do not
dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are
changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of
the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take
it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away
into a garbage can or onto the ground.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

503 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from
the bottom of the engine, and drain the
oil into a suitable container.

1.5 L engine models

Drain Bolt

Washer
2.0 L engine models

Drain Bolt

Washer

Maintenance

Continued

503

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

1.5 L engine models

Oil Filter

2.0 L engine models

Oil Filter
Maintenance

504

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the
remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to
the engine contact surface.
u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the
contact surface of the engine block, and
install a new oil filter.
u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to
the oil filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then
reinstall the drain bolt.
u Tightening torque:
30 lbf∙ft (40 N∙m, 4.0 kgf∙m)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the
engine.
u Engine oil change capacity (including
filter):
1.5 L engine models

3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
2.0 L engine models

4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine.
11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the
drain bolt or oil filter.
12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes,
and then check the oil level on the
dipstick.
u If necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
You will need a special wrench to replace the oil
filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the
instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The
low oil pressure indicator should go off within five
seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine, and check
your work.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant
1Engine Coolant

Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any
straight antifreeze or water.
We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the
reserve tank. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

1. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve
tank.
2. If the coolant level is below the MIN mark,
add the specified coolant until it reaches
the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

MIN

NOTICE

Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of
antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at
temperatures as low as about −31°F (−35°C). If your
vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures
below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the
coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for
details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may
use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a
temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality
coolant recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result
in corrosion, causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed
and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.

Continued

Maintenance

Reserve Tank

Removing the reserve tank cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the reserve tank
cap.

■ Checking the Coolant
MAX

3 WARNING

505

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

■ Adding the Coolant
1.5 L engine models

Reserve Tank
Cap
2.0 L engine models

Maintenance

506

Reserve Tank
Cap

1Engine Coolant

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool.
2. Turn the reserve tank cap 1/8 of a turn
counterclockwise and relieve any pressure
in the cooling system.
3. Push down and turn the reserve tank cap
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Pour coolant into the reserve tank until it
reaches the MAX mark.
5. Put the reserve tank cap back on, and
tighten it fully.

Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your
vehicle’s cooling system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or with the engine components.
1Adding the Coolant
NOTICE

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill
any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can
damage components in the engine compartment.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid

Transmission Fluid
Models with continuously variable transmission

■ Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.
Do not attempt to check or change the continuously variable transmission fluid
yourself.

1Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Fluid
NOTICE

Do not mix HCF-2 with other transmission fluids.
Using a transmission fluid other than HCF-2 may
adversely affect the operation and durability of your
vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission.
Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that
is not equivalent to HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's
new vehicle limited warranty.

Models with manual transmission

■ Manual Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary.

If Honda MTF is not available, you may use the API
certificated SAE 0 W-20 or 5 W-20 viscosity motor oil
as a temporary measure.
Replace with MTF as soon as possible. Motor oil does
not contain the proper additives for the transmission
and continued use can cause decreased shifting
performance and lead to transmission damage.

Maintenance

Do not attempt to check or change the manual transmission fluid yourself.

1Manual Transmission Fluid

507

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake/Clutch * Fluid

Brake/Clutch * Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3
Use the same fluid for both the brakes and clutch.

■ Checking the Brake Fluid
The fluid level should be between the MIN
and MAX marks on the side of the reserve
tank.
MAX
MIN

Reserve Tank

Maintenance

508

* Not available on all models

Manual transmission models

The brake fluid reserve tank is also used for
your vehicle’s clutch fluid. As long as you keep
the brake fluid level as instructed above, there
is no need for checking the clutch fluid level.

1Brake/Clutch * Fluid
NOTICE

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your
vehicle’s braking system and can cause extensive
damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should
use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed
container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion
and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the
brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy
Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark,
have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn
brake pads as soon as possible.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid by looking at the reservoir.
If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Except Canadian 1.5 L engine models
Canadian models

If the washer fluid is low, the washer level
indicator * appears on the instrument panel or
a message appears on the driver information
interface *.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water
solution in the windshield washer reservoir.
Antifreeze can damage your vehicle’s paint. A
vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield
washer pump.

Canadian 1.5 L engine models

* Not available on all models

Maintenance

Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

509

Replacing Light Bulbs
Headlight Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
High beam headlight:
High beam headlight:
Low beam headlight:
Low beam headlight:

1Headlight Bulbs

60 W (HB3 for halogen bulb type)
LED type *
55 W (H11 for halogen bulb type) *
LED type *

■ High Beam Headlight
Models with halogen headlights

Coupler
Tab

Bulb
Maintenance

510

* Not available on all models

1. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
2. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
3. Insert a new bulb into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise.
4. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

Models with halogen headlights

NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit.
Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause
the bulb to overheat and shatter.
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not
need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry
heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted
at a dealer or by a qualified technician.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its base,
and protect the glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with
denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.
Models with LED headlights

Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda
dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

511 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHeadlight Bulbs

■ Low Beam Headlights
Models with halogen headlights

Bulb

Tab

Coupler

Maintenance

511

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

Fog Light Bulbs *
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Fog Light: 35 W (H8 for halogen bulb type)

1Fog Light Bulbs *
Insert a flat-tip screwdriver, lift and remove the center
pin to remove the clip.

1. Remove the clips using a flat-tip
screwdriver, remove the bolt, and push up
the under cover.

Insert the clip with the center pin raised, and push
until it is flat.

Maintenance

Push until the pin
is flat.

512

* Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFog Light Bulbs *

Bulb

Coupler

Tab

2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.
3. Rotate the old bulb counter-clockwise to
remove.
4. Insert a new bulb into the fog light
assembly and turn it clockwise.
5. Insert the coupler into the connector of the
bulb.

1Fog Light Bulbs *
NOTICE

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration,
or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
When replacing a halogen bulb, handle it by its
plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with
your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

513

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

514 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Models with halogen headlights

Front Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Socket

Bulb

1. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
2. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Models with LED headlights

Front Turn Signal Lights
Maintenance

514

Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

515 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuFront Side Marker Light Bulbs

Front Side Marker Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Front Side Marker Light: 3 W
1. Push the tab to remove the light assembly.
2. Push the tab to remove the coupler.

Tab
Driver side

3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise to
remove it, then remove the old bulb.
4. Insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Maintenance

Socket

Continued

515

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

516 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuParking/Daytime Running Lights

Passenger side

4. Turn the socket clockwise to remove it,
then remove the old bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.
Bulb
Socket

Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer
inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights *
Maintenance

516

Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect
and replace the light assembly.

* Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Tail/Rear Side Marker Light, Rear Turn Signal Light and Back-Up Light Bulbs

Brake Light, Tail/Rear Side Marker Light, Rear Turn
Signal Light and Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Brake Light: 21 W
Tail/Rear Side Marker Light: LED
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
Back-Up Light: 16 W

Socket

3. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
4. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
5. Slide the light assembly onto the guide on
the body.
6. Align the pins with the body grommets,
then push in until they fully seat.

Maintenance

Bulb

Tail/rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an
authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light
assembly.

1. Use a Phillip-head screwdriver or socket to
remove the bolts.
2. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

Bolt

Bulb

1Brake Light, Tail/Rear Side Marker Light, Rear Turn Signal Light
and Back-Up Light Bulbs

Socket

517

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

518 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillights

Taillights
Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the
light assembly.

Rear License Plate Light
Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and
replace the light assembly.

High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
When replacing, use the following bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light: 21 W

Bulb
Maintenance

518

Socket

1. Open the trunk.
2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it.
3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks and the hard surfaces
of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1Changing the Wiper Blade Rubber

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1.
2. While holding the wiper switch in the MIST
position, turn the ignition switch to ON
(w *1, then to LOCK (0 *1.
u Both wiper arms are set to the
maintenance position as shown in the
image.

NOTICE

Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it
may damage the wiper arm and/or the windscreen.

3. Lift both wiper arms.

Maintenance

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

519

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

520 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

4. Press and hold the tab, then slide the
holder off the wiper arm.

Tab

Blade

5. Pull the end of the wiper blade in the
direction of the arrow in the image until it
is out of the holder’s end cap.

End Cap At
The Bottom
Maintenance

Blade

Holder

520

6. Pull the wiper blade in the opposite
direction to slide it out of its holder.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

521 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade Rubber

Blade

Holder

Cap

7. Insert the flat side of the new wiper blade
onto the bottom part of the holder. Insert
the blade all the way.
8. Install the end of the wiper blade into the
cap.
9. Slide the holder onto the wiper arm until it
locks.
10. Lower both wiper arms.
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 and
hold the wiper switch in the MIST position
until both wiper arms return to the
standard position.

Maintenance

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

521

Checking and Maintaining Tires
Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.

■ Inflation guidelines
Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and
comfort. Refer to the driver’s doorjamb label or specification’s page for the specified
pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and
are more likely to fail from overheating.
Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards,
and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the
others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.

Maintenance

At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in
all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa,
0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.

■ Inspection guidelines
Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for:
• Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord.
• Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks.
• Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment.
• Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 527

• Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

522

1Checking Tires

3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or
improperly inflated can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding tire inflation and
maintenance.
Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This
means the vehicle has been parked for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If
necessary, add or release air until the specified
pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as
4–6 psi (30–40 kPa, 0.3–0.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if
checked when cold.
U.S. models

Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must
calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 452
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent
vibration while driving. New tires and any that have
been removed and reinstalled should be properly
balanced.
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before
long trips.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label

Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver’s doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading
information.
Label
Example

Tire Labeling
Example

1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb contains:
a The number of people your vehicle can carry.
b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight.
c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare, if
equipped.
d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

1Tire Sizes

Tire Size
Tire
Identification
Number (TIN)

The tires that came on your vehicle have a
number of markings. Those you should be
aware of are described below.

Maximum
Tire Pressure
Tire Size

■ Tire Sizes

Maintenance

Maximum
Tire Load

Following is an example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component means.
P205/55 R16 89H
P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).
205: Tire width in millimeters.
55: Aspect ratio (the tire’s section height as a
percentage of its width).
R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial).
16: Rim diameter in inches.
89: Load index (a numerical code associated with the
maximum load the tire can carry).
H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the
maximum speed rating).

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

Continued

523

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

■ Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like
the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

■ Glossary of Tire Terminology

Maintenance

524

Cold Tire Pressure – The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Load Rating – Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given
inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure – The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can
hold.
Maximum Load Rating – Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum
permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure – The cold tire inflation pressure recommended
by the manufacturer.
Treadwear Indicators (TWI) – Means the projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209
DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all
requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark.
FW6X: Tire type code.
22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year
Week

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety
Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction,
and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these
gradings.

■ Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

Continued

For example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
Maintenance

■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading

525

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Maintenance

526

■ Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.

1Traction

■ Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

1Temperature

Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

527 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear
Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is
located is 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) shallower than
elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so
that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire.
Worn out tires have poor traction on wet
roads.

Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road
conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and
environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

Maintenance

In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is
recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five
years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10
years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

527

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and
maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire’s sidewall). Using tires of a
different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn’t possible, replace the
front or rear tires in pairs.
Make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

Maintenance

528

1Tire and Wheel Replacement

3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can
affect handling and stability. This can cause
a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or
killed.
Always use the size and type of tires
recommended in this owner’s manual.

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation

Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the information display */
driver information interface * helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire
life.

■ Tires without rotation marks

1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be
rotated front to back (not from one side to the other).
Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation
indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Rotate the tires as shown here.
Front
Front
Direction Mark

U.S. models

■ Tires with rotation marks
Rotate the tires as shown here.

* Not available on all models

Maintenance

Front

Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the
TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 452

529

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires,
or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when
driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent
skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the
law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.

Maintenance

For winter tires:
• Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires.
• Mount the tires to all four wheels.
For tire chains:
• Install them on the front tires only.
• Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Models with 215/55R16 tires

Cable-type: Autotrac 0154505
Models with 215/50R17 tires

Cable-type: Autotrac 0154005
• Follow the chain manufacturer’s instruction when installing. Mount them as
tightly as you can.
• Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension.
• Drive slowly.

530

1Winter Tires

3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly
installing chains, can damage the brake
lines and cause a crash in which you can be
seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner’s
manual regarding the selection and use of
tire chains.
NOTICE

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly
installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are
hitting any part of the vehicle.
When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions regarding vehicle
operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware that these tires are not designed for winter
driving conditions. For more information, contact a
dealer.

Battery
Checking the Battery
Check the battery terminals for corrosion
monthly.

1Battery

3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to
explode with enough force to kill or
seriously hurt you.

If your vehicle’s battery is disconnected or goes dead:
• The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 206

• The clock * resets.

When conducting any battery
maintenance, wear protective clothing and
a face shield, or have a skilled technician do
it.

2 Adjusting the Clock P. 128

• The navigation system * is disabled.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual

2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 85

* Not available on all models

Maintenance

• Canadian models only
The immobilizer system needs to be reset.

WARNING: Battery post, terminals,
and related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds.
Wash your hands after handling.

531

uuBatteryuCharging the Battery

Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle’s electrical system.
Always disconnect the negative (–) cable first, and reconnect it last.

1Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals
by applying a baking powder and water solution.
Clean the terminal with a damp towel. Cloth/towel
dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
When replacing the battery, the replacement must be
of the same specifications.
Please consult a dealer for more information.
The VSA® and CMBSTM* indicators may come on
when your turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 after
re-connecting a battery.
Drive a short distance at 12 mph (20 km/h). Each
indicator should go off. If either or both do not, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Maintenance
*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

532

* Not available on all models

Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Button Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery.

NOTICE

■ Master Keys with Remote Transmitter *
Screw

An improperly disposed of battery can damage the
environment. Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.

Battery type: CR1620
1. Unscrew the cover with a small Phillipshead screwdriver.
2. Open the remote transmitter.
u Wrap the small flat-tip screwdriver with a
cloth to prevent scratching the
transmitter.

Battery

1Replacing the Button Battery

Replacement batteries are commercially available or
at a dealer.

3. Remove the button battery with the small
flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.
Maintenance

* Not available on all models

Continued

533

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

534 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuRemote Transmitter CareuReplacing the Button Battery

■ Smart Entry Remote *
Battery type: CR2032
1. Remove the built-in key.

Battery

Maintenance

534

* Not available on all models

2. Remove the upper half of the cover by
carefully prying on the edge with a coin.
u Remove carefully to avoid losing the
buttons.
u Wrap a coin with a cloth to prevent
scratching the smart entry remote.
3. Make sure to replace the battery with the
correct polarity.

Heating System */Climate Control System * Maintenance
Air Conditioning *
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE
J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and
certified technicians.

1Heating System */Climate Control System * Maintenance
NOTICE

Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one
removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.

Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment.
To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the
evaporator with one removed from a used or
salvaged vehicle.

New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and
labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

Refrigerant in your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
flammable and can be ignited during servicing if
proper procedures are not followed.
The air conditioner label is found under the hood:
2 Safety Labels P. 73
2 Specifications P. 576, 578
Canadian models

: Caution
: Flammable Refrigerant

: Air Conditioning
System

Dust and Pollen Filter
The heating system */climate control system * is equipped with a dust and pollen filter
that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM
messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your
vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
* Not available on all models

Maintenance

: Requires Registered
Technician to Service

1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the heating system */climate
control system * deteriorates noticeably, and the
windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be
replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

535

Cleaning
Interior Care
Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt.
Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.

■ Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts.
Let the belts air dry. Wipe the loops of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.

Loop

1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical
devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are
splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices
such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may
cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside
the vehicle.
If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on
electrical devices, consult a dealer.
Depending on their composition, chemicals and
liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles,
and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles.
Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as
benzene or gasoline.

Maintenance

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them
away using a dry cloth.
Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts
or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window.
Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a
soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Models with Front Sensor Camera

Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass
cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front
sensor camera and the rainfall/light sensor *.

536

* Not available on all models

uuCleaninguInterior Care

■ Floor Mats *

1Floor Mats *

Unlock

Lock

The driver’s floor mat hooks over the floor
anchors, which keep the mat from sliding
forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn
the anchor knobs to the unlock position.
When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn
the knobs to the lock position.

If you use any floor mats that were not originally
provided with your vehicle, make sure they are
designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and
are securely anchored by the floor anchors.
Position the rear-seat floor mats properly. If they are
not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere
with the front seat functions.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of
the anchored mat.

■ Maintaining Genuine Leather *

* Not available on all models

It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as
soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting
in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the
leather. In addition, please note that some dark
colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats
resulting in discoloration or stains.
Maintenance

To properly clean leather:
1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust.
2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap.
3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth.
4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

1Maintaining Genuine Leather *

537

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches
on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you
find a scratch, promptly repair it.

■ Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following
conditions:
• If driving on roads with road salt.
• If driving in coastal areas.
• If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.

1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can
cause a malfunction.

■ Using an Automated Car Wash
• Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash.
• Fold in the door mirrors.
• Turn off the automatic intermittent wipers *.
Maintenance

538

■ Using High Pressure Cleaners
• Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body.
• Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior.
• Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

* Not available on all models

Air Intake Vents
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the
fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel
system or engine.

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Applying Wax

1Applying Wax

A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle’s paint from the
elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle’s paint to the
elements, so reapply as necessary.

■ Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they
may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and
clean water.

NOTICE

Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage
the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe
away spills immediately.
1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when
you want to repair the painted surface of the parts
made of resin.

■ Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

■ Maintaining Aluminum Wheels *

* Not available on all models

Continued

Maintenance

Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road
contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent
to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals
(including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish
on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish,
the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains,
wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

539

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

540 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuCleaninguExterior Care

■ Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily
if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash.
Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant
enough difference between the ambient and inside-lens temperatures (similar to
vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural
processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights.
Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the lens frame
surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water
accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.

Maintenance

540

Accessories and Modifications
Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following:
• Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions.
• Do not install accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or backs
of the front seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows.
Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the
vehicle’s airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags
deploy.
• Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 567

• Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for
assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

1Accessories and Modifications

3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can
affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a crash in which
you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's
manual regarding accessories and
modifications.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to
ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

Maintenance

541

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

542 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications

Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or
reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar
effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance.
Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not
make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle
to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

Maintenance

542

Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools
Types of Tools .................................. 544
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 545
Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine ........................ 552

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is
Weak..........................................553
Emergency Engine Stop ................... 554
Jump Starting.................................... 555
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 558
Overheating
How to Handle Overheating............. 559

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 561
If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ................................................. 561
If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 562
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks ................................... 563
If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks at the Same Time When the
Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes
On ................................................. 564

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator Comes On ....................... 565
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator
Comes On or Blinks ....................... 566
Fuses
Fuse Locations ................................. 567
Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 570
Emergency Towing........................... 571
When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill
Door................................................. 572
When You Cannot Open the Trunk.....573
Refueling........................................... 574

543

Tools
Types of Tools
1Types of Tools
The tools are stored in the trunk.
Wheel Nut Wrench/
Jack Handle

Jack Handle Bar

Handling the Unexpected

544

Jack

Funnel

If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually
to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact
spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery surface, and apply the parking
brake.

1Changing a Flat Tire
Follow compact spare precautions:
Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact
spare. It should be set to the specified pressure.
Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the
vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with
a full-size tire as soon as possible.

Continuously variable transmission models

Manual transmission models

2. Move the shift lever to (R .
All models

3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 .
*1

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire.
If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of
the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact
spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it
with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear.
Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

Handling the Unexpected

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are
specifically for this model. Do not use them with
another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact
spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

2. Move the shift lever to (P .

NOTICE

Do not use the jack if it doesn’t work properly. Call
your dealer or a professional towing service.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

545

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Open the trunk floor lid.

Handling the Unexpected

Tool Case

2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. Take
the jack and wheel nut wrench out of the
tool case.
3. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

Spare Tire

4. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear
of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

The tire to be replaced.

546

Wheel
Blocks

1Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
The wheel nut wrench supplied with your vehicle is
specially adapted to fit the holder shaft. Do not use
any other tool.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

547 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

5. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up)
under the vehicle body, near the tire that
needs to be replaced.

Models with wheel cover

Jack Handle Bar
Wheel Nut

Wheel
Cover
All models

Handling the Unexpected

6. Put the flat tip of the jack handle bar into
the edge of the wheel cover. Carefully pry
the edge and remove the cover.
u Wrap a cloth around the flat tip of the
jack handle bar to prevent scratches on
the cover.

7. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn
using the wheel nut wrench.

Continued

547

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ How to Set Up the Jack

1How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point
closest to the tire to be changed.

3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack,
seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire
exactly, and never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the jack.

Handling the Unexpected

Jacking Points
Jacking Point

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in
the image until the top of the jack contacts
the jacking point.
u Make sure that the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar
and the jack handle, until the tire is off the
ground.

Jack
Handle
Bar

548

Wheel Nut
Wrench as Jack Handle

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the
vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle.
Other jacks may not support the weight (“load”) or
their shape may not match.
The following instructions must be followed to use
the jack safely:
• Do not use while the engine is running.
• Use only where the ground is firm and level.
• Use only at the jacking points.
• Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack.
• Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Replacing the Flat Tire

1Replacing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra
torque using your foot or a pipe.
Models with wheel cover

Make sure the wire support ring is hooked into the
clips around the edge of the wheel cover.

5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack.
Tighten the wheel nuts in the order
indicated in the image. Go around,
tightening the nuts, two to three times in
this order.
Wheel nut torque:
80 lbf∙ft (108 N∙m, 11 kgf∙m)

Continued

Clips

Align the valve mark on the wheel cover to the tire
valve on the wheel, then install the wheel cover.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel
with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire.
4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, and stop
rotating.

Valve Mark

549

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

■ Storing the Flat Tire
Models with
aluminum
wheels

1Storing the Flat Tire
Models with aluminum wheels

1. Remove the center cap.

3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a
crash and can seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely
before driving.

Handling the Unexpected

Models with wheel cover

All models

Spacer Cone
Wing Bolt

For
compact
spare tire

For fullsize tire

2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire
well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing
bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the
bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely put the jack and wheel nut wrench
back in the tool case. Store the case in the
trunk.

Make sure the wire support ring is on the outer side
of the tire valve as shown.

Tire Valve

Wire Support Ring

550

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

U.S. models

■ TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator
comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), the
indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on. Tire Pressures Low
appears on the driver information interface *, but this is normal.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 452

* Not available on all models

Handling the Unexpected

The system cannot monitor the pressure of the spare tire. Manually check the spare
tire pressure to be sure that it is correct.

551

Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an
assisting vehicle to jump start it.
2 Jump Starting P. 555

Handling the Unexpected

Starter condition
Starter doesn’t turn or turns
over slowly.
The battery may be dead. Check
each of the items on the right and
respond accordingly.

Checklist
Models with smart entry system

Check for a message on the driver information interface.
● If the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message appears
2 If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak P. 553

uMake sure the smart entry remote is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 158

Check the brightness of the interior lights.
Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness.
● If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 531
●

If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 567

The starter turns over normally
but the engine doesn’t start.
There may be a problem with the
fuse. Check each of the items on
the right and respond accordingly.

Review the engine start procedure.
Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 402

Check the immobilizer system indicator.
When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 150

Check the fuel level.
There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 109

Check the fuse.
Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 570

If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 571

552

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

553 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

Models with smart entry system

If the Smart Entry Remote Battery is Weak

2. Depress the brake pedal (continuously
variable transmission) or clutch pedal
(manual transmission) and press the
ENGINE START/STOP button within 10
seconds after the beeper sounds and the
ENGINE START/STOP button changes
from flashing to on.
u If you don’t depress the pedal, the mode
will change to ACCESSORY.

Handling the Unexpected

If the beeper sounds, the To Start, Hold Remote Near Start Button message
appears on the driver information interface, the ENGINE START/STOP button
flashes, and the engine won’t start. Start the engine as follows:
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/
STOP button with the H logo on the smart
entry remote while the ENGINE START/
STOP button is flashing. The buttons on
the smart entry remote should be facing
you.
u The button flashes for about 30 seconds.

553

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Models with smart entry system

Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an
emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the
following operations:
• Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds.
• Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice.

Handling the Unexpected

The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables
the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will
require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use
both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a
safe place. With manual transmission models you can also downshift the
transmission to utilize engine braking.
Continuously variable transmission models

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped.
To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, move the shift lever to (P after the vehicle
comes to a complete stop.
Canadian continuously variable transmission models

Then press the ENGINE START/STOP button twice without depressing the brake
pedal.
Manual transmission models

The power mode changes to VEHICLE OFF.

554

1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the button while driving unless it is
absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched
off.

Jump Starting
Jump Starting Procedure
■ Jump Starting Procedure

1Jump Starting

2.0 L engine models

3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow
the correct procedure, seriously injuring
anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking
materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they
do not come off when the engine vibrates. Also be
careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the
cable ends to touch each other while attaching or
detaching the jumper cables.

Handling the Unexpected

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,
then open the hood.
1. Connect the first jumper cable to your
1.5 L engine models
vehicle’s battery + terminal.
2. Connect the other end of the first jumper
cable to the booster battery + terminal.
u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.
u When using an automotive battery
charger to boost your 12-volt battery,
select a lower charging voltage than 15Booster Battery
volt. Check the charger manual for the
proper setting.
3. Connect the second jumper cable to the
booster battery - terminal.

Booster Battery

Continued

555

uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure

1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Handling the Unexpected

556

4. Connect the other end of the second
jumper cable to the engine mounting bolt
as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable
to any other part.
5. If your vehicle is connected to another
vehicle, start the assisting vehicle’s engine
and increase its rpm slightly.
6. Attempt to start your vehicle’s engine. If it
turns over slowly, check that the jumper
cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

1Jump Starting
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and
may prevent the engine from starting.

uuJump StartinguJump Starting Procedure

■ What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following
order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground.
2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery terminal.
3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal.
4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.

The VSA® and CMBSTM* indicators may come on
when your turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1 after
re-connecting a battery.
Drive a short distance at more than12 mph (20 km/h).
Each indicator should go off. If either or both do not,
have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

1What to Do After the Engine Starts

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

* Not available on all models

557

Shift Lever Does Not Move
Continuously variable transmission models

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P
position.

■ Releasing the Lock
Cover

1. Set the parking brake.
Models without smart entry system

2. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Models with smart entry system

Handling the Unexpected

2. Remove the built-in key from the smart
entry remote.
All models

Slot

3. Move the removable beverage holder tray
rearward.
2 Front seat beverage holders P. 185

4. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a small flattip screwdriver to remove the cover of the
shift lock release slot. Put the tip of the flattip screwdriver into the slot and remove it
as shown in the image.
5. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot.
6. While pushing the key in, press the shift
lever release button and place the shift lever
into (N .
u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as
possible.

Release
Button
Shift Lock
Release Slot

558

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
• The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses
power.
• Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.

Continued

3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated
engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming
out.
NOTICE

Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge
pointer at the H mark may damage the engine.

Handling the Unexpected

■ First thing to do
1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood.
u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating

559

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

■ Next thing to do

1How to Handle Overheating
MAX

Reserve Tank
Handling the Unexpected

560

MIN

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and
stop the engine once the temperature
gauge pointer comes down.
u If the cooling fan is not operating,
immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect
the coolant level and check the cooling
system components for leaks.
u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is
low, or no coolant in the tank, check that
the radiator is cool. Cover the reserve
tank cap with a heavy cloth and open the
cap. Add coolant until it reaches the
MAX mark, and put the cap back on.

■ Last thing to do
Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the temperature gauge.
If the temperature gauge pointer has gone down, resume driving. If it has not gone
down, contact a dealer for repairs.

3 WARNING
Removing the reserve tank cap while the
engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray
out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool
down before removing the reserve tank
cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only.
Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze
as soon as possible.

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the engine oil pressure is low.
■ What to do as soon as the indicator comes on
1. Immediately park the vehicle on level ground in a safe place.
2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights on.
■ What to do after parking the vehicle
1. Stop the engine and let it sit for about three minute.
2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Indicator Comes On
NOTICE

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause
serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

2 Oil Check P. 499

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on
Comes on when the battery is not being charged.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Turn off the heating system */climate control system *, rear defogger, and
other electrical systems, and immediately contact a dealer for repairs.

* Not available on all models

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the
engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge
the battery.

Handling the Unexpected

3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure indicator.
u The indicator goes off: Start driving again.
u The indicator does not go off within 10 seconds: Stop the engine
and contact a dealer for repairs immediately.

561

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or
Blinks

Handling the Unexpected

562

■ Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink
• Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system.
• Blinks when engine misfiring is detected.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp comes on
Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a
dealer.
■ What to do when the indicator lamp blinks
Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least
10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE

If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on,
the emissions control system and the engine could be
damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when
restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at
31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle
inspected.

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks
U.S.

Canada

(Red)

■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

Have your vehicle repaired immediately.
It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there
is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop
immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift
the gears.
If the brake system indicator and ABS indicator come
on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution
system is not working. This can result in vehicle
instability under sudden braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work.
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle
checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes
On or Blinks at the Same Time When the
Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On
P. 564

Handling the Unexpected

• The brake fluid is low.
• There is a malfunction in the brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on while driving
Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure.
• If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop.
• If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking.
■ Reason for the indicator to blink
• There is a problem with the electric parking brake system.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks
Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer
immediately.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in
a short period of time, the brake stops operating to
prevent heating of the system and the indicator
blinks.
It returns to its original state in approximately 1
minute.

563

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or
Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System
Indicator (Amber) Comes On
U.S.

Canada

(Red)
Handling the Unexpected

564

U.S.

■If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the
same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
release the parking brake manually or automatically.

If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able
to release it.

2 Parking Brake P. 457

If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake
system indicator (amber) come on at the same time,
the parking brake is working.

•If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at
the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on,
stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer
immediately.
u Preventing the vehicle from moving

If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same
time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes
on, the parking brake may not work because it is
checking the system.

Continuously variable transmission models

Canada

1 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same
Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

Move the shift lever to (P .
Manual transmission models

Move the shift lever to (1 or (R .
(Amber)

•If the brake system indicator (amber) comes on alone, avoid using the
parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

565 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator
Comes On
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on

Models with driver information interface

The Drive Carefully Systems Initializing... message appears on the
driver information interface.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
• Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle
inspected by a dealer.
• If the EPS indicator, VSA® indicator, VSA® OFF indicator, CMBSTM
indicator *, and low tire pressure/TPMS indicator * come on
simultaneously, you need to calibrate the VSA and EPS systems.
Drive at a speed of more than 12 mph (20 km/h) for less than 10
seconds to calibrate the VSA and EPS systems.
If the indicators come on and stay on, park your vehicle in a safe
place, turn off and restart the engine, then repeat the above
operation.
If the indicators still come on and stay on, immediately have your
vehicle inspected by a dealer.
* Not available on all models

Handling the Unexpected

• Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system.
• If you depress the accelerator pedal repeatedly to increase the engine
speed while the engine is idling, the indicator comes on, and
sometimes the steering wheel becomes harder to operate.
• Comes on when EPS steering angle center point memory is lost. This
could be due to a number of problems to include: battery disconnect,
main fuse blow, low battery causing reset of the EPS system, wire
damage to EPS harness. Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), VSA® OFF,
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) *, and low tire
pressure/TPMS * indicators also come on with EPS indicator.

565

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

U.S. models

If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or
Blinks
■ Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink

Handling the Unexpected

566

A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated.
If there is a problem with the TPMS or the compact spare tire is installed,
the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on.
■ What to do when the indicator comes on
Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the
pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on
the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
■ What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on
Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact
spare tire causes the indicator to blink, change the tire to a full-size tire.
The indicator goes off after driving for a few miles (kilometers).
u Calibrate the TPMS after a full-size tire is reinstalled.

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE

Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause
it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always
inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

567 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working,
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1 and
check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating

■ Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to
open the box.
Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box
cover. Locate the fuse in question by the
fuse number and box cover number.

IG Main
2

* Not available on all models

Fuse Box Option *
Fuse Box
Front Wiper Motor
Headlight Low Beam Main
Rear Defroster
Starter Motor*4
−*5
Fuse Box
ABS/VSA Motor
ABS/VSA FSR
Blower Motor

Amps
(60 A)
(30 A)
(50 A)
−
30 A
−
30 A
125 A
70 A
30 A*4
50 A*5
(40 A)
60 A
30 A
30 A
40 A
30 A
−
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Circuit Protected
−
−
−
−
Cooling Fan
Washer
FI Main
FI Sub
Stop Lights
Injector*3
LAF
FI ECU
Parking Lights
Hazard
IG Coil
Transmission*6
Daytime Running Lights
Back Up

Amps
−
−
−
−
5A
15 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
(15 A)
5A
10 A
10 A
15 A
15 A
(15 A)
10 A
10 A

Handling the Unexpected

Circuit Protected
Passenger’s Power Seat */
Rear Seat Heaters *
Cooling Fan*2
Cooling Fan*3
−
IG Main*4
−*5
Headlight High Beam Main
Battery
EPS

*1:Models with the smart entry system have
an ENGINE START/STOP button
instead of an ignition switch.
*2:2.0L engine models
*3:1.5L engine models
*4:Models with smart entry system
*5:Models without smart entry system
*6:Continuously variable transmission
models
Continued

567

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

568 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Handling the Unexpected

Circuit Protected
19
Audio
20
Audio AMP *
21
Interior Lights
22
Front Fog Lights *
23
A/C Compressor *
24
Horn
25 Left Headlight Low Beam
26 Right Headlight Low Beam
27
VB ACT*3
28 Left Headlight High Beam
29 Right Headlight High Beam
30
−
31
Rear Seat Heaters *
Passenger’s Power Seat
32
Sliding *
Passenger’s Power Seat
33
Reclining *
34
−
35
−
36
−
*3:1.5L engine models

Amps
15 A
(30 A)
10 A
(15 A)
(10 A)
10 A
10 A
10 A
(10 A)
10 A
10 A
−
(15 A)

■ Interior Fuse Box
Located under the dashboard.

Fuse Label

Fuse locations are shown on the label on
the side panel.
Locate the fuse in question by the fuse
number and label number.

(20 A)
(20 A)
−
−
−

■ Circuit protected and fuse rating
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

568

* Not available on all models

Circuit Protected
Accessory
−*1
Key Lock*2
−
Front Sensor Camera*1
Transmission*2, *3
Option
SRS Indicator
Meter
Fuel Pump

Amps
10 A
−
(5 A)
−
(5 A)
(10 A)
10 A
10 A
10 A
15 A

Circuit Protected
9
AIRCON
10
−
11
Engine Control
12 Passenger Side Door Lock
13 Driver Side Rear Door Unlock
Rear Driver’s Side Power
14
Window
Front Passenger’s Side
15
Power Window
16
Door Lock
Transmission*1, *3
17
Front Sensor Camera*2
18
−
19
Moonroof *
20
−
21
ACG
22
Daytime Running Lights
23
−
24
Front Sensor Camera *
25
Driver’s Door Lock
26 Passenger Side Door Unlock
Rear Passenger’s Side
27
Power Window

Amps
10 A
−
5A
10 A
(10 A)
(20 A)
20 A
20 A
(10 A)
(5 A)
−
(20 A)
−
10 A
10 A
−
(5 A)
10 A
10 A
(20 A)

*1:Models with smart entry system
*2:Models without smart entry system
*3:Continuously variable transmission
models

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

569 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuFusesuFuse Locations

28
29
30
31

Amps
20 A
20 A
10 A
−
(20 A)
(20 A)
(20 A)
10 A
10 A
−
−
(10 A)
10 A

*1:Models with smart entry system
*2:Models without smart entry system

* Not available on all models

Handling the Unexpected

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39

Circuit Protected
Driver’s Power Window
Front Accessory Power
Socket
Smart Entry*1
−*2
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining *
Front Seat Heater *
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding *
VSA/ABS
SRS
−
−
Driver Side Rear Door Lock
Driver’s Door Unlock

569

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses
Blown Fuse

Combined
Fuse

Handling the Unexpected

Fuse Puller

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0 *1. Turn
headlights and all accessories off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover.
3. Check the large fuse in the engine
compartment.
u If the fuse is blown, use a Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the screw and
replace it with a new one.
4. Inspect the small fuses in the engine
compartment and the vehicle interior.
u If there is a burned out fuse, remove it
with the fuse puller and replace it with a
new one.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.

570

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE

Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating
greatly increases the chances of damaging the
electrical system.
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine
compartment fuse box cover.

Emergency Towing
Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.

■ Flat bed equipment
The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

■ Wheel lift equipment
The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off
the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to
tow your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing
NOTICE

Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed
to support the vehicle's weight.
NOTICE

Improper towing such as towing behind a
motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the
transmission.

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you
cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must
be transported by the flat bed equipment.
2 Parking Brake P. 457

Handling the Unexpected

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain.
It is very dangerous, since ropes or chains may shift
from side to side or break.

571

When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
■ What to Do When Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Pull the green release cord beneath the rear
tray to the right.
u The release cord unlocks the fuel fill door
when it is pulled.
Release Cord

Handling the Unexpected

572

1When You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have
your vehicle checked.

When You Cannot Open the Trunk
■ What to Do When Unable to Open the Trunk
If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure.
1. Remove the cover with a key.
Trunk Release Cover
u Wrap a key with a cloth to prevent
scratching the cover.

2. Pull the release lever.
3. Replace the cover.

Following up:
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have
your vehicle checked.

Handling the Unexpected

Trunk Release Lever

1When You Cannot Open the Trunk

573

Refueling
Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel
container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Press on the edge of the fuel fill door to
make it pop up slightly.
u The fuel fill door opens.
3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the
trunk.
Funnel
Handling the Unexpected

574

2 Types of Tools P. 544

4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower
part of filler opening, then insert it slowly
and fully.
u Make sure that the end of the funnel
goes down along with the filler pipe.
5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel
container.
u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.
6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck.
u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before
storing it.
7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container
or any funnel other than the one provided with your
vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system.
Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel
tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel
system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is
gasoline before you refuel.

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other
information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 576
Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number ......................................... 580
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 581
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 582

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 583
Warranty Coverages ........................ 585
Authorized Manuals......................... 587
Customer Service Information......... 588

575

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

576 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Specifications
2.0 L engine models

■ Vehicle Specifications
Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Honda Civic 4-Door

Information

576

Displacement
Spark Plugs

121.76 cu-in (1,996 cm3)
DILKAR7H11GS
NGK
DILKAR7G11GS
DENSO
DXE22HQR-D11S

2
3
5

■ Fuel

U.S.: 3,737 lbs (1,695 kg)
Canada: 1,695 kg

Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

U.S.: 1,984 lbs (900 kg)
Canada: 900 kg

■ Washer Fluid

U.S.: 1,786 lbs (810 kg)
Canada: 810 kg

■ Air Conditioning *
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
Quantity

■ Engine Specifications

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
13.2 – 15.0 oz (375 – 425 g)
RL85HM (POE)
4.7 – 6.3 cu-in (77 – 103 cm3)

* Not available on all models

Tank Capacity

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

■ Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam)
Headlights (High Beam)
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Front Side Marker Lights
Front Turn Signal Lights
Brake Lights
Rear Turn Signal Lights
Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights
Back-Up Lights
Taillights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Light
Interior Lights
Map Lights
Ceiling Light
Vanity Mirror Lights *
Trunk Light

55W (H11)
60W (HB3)
LED
3W
21W (Amber)
21W
21W (Amber)
LED
16W
LED
21W
LED
8W
8W
2W
5W

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

577 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake/Clutch * Fluid
Specified

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid *
Specified
Capacity

Recommended

Capacity

Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
Change
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)

■ Manual Transmission Fluid *
Specified
Capacity

■ Engine Oil

Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Change
2.0 US qt (1.9 L)

■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
4.2 US qt (4.0 L)
Change
including
4.4 US qt (4.2 L)
filter

■ Engine Coolant
Specified
Ratio
Capacity

Regular
Compact
Spare *
Wheel Size

Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

215/55R16 93H
32 (220 [2.2])
T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
16 x 7J
16 x 4T

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.4 US gal (5.32 L)
(change including the remaining
0.2 US gal (0.75 L) in the reserve tank)

Information

* Not available on all models

Continued

577

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

578 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuSpecificationsu

1.5 L engine models

■ Vehicle Specifications
Model
No. of Passengers:
Front
Rear
Total
Weights:
Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Front)
Gross Axle Weight
Rating (Rear)

Honda Civic 4-Door

Information

578

Displacement
Spark Plugs

91.26 cu-in (1,496 cm3)
NGK
ILZKAR8H8S

■ Light Bulbs
Headlights (Low Beam)
Headlights (High Beam)

2
3
5
U.S.: 3,902 lbs (1,770 kg)
Canada: 1,770 kg
U.S.: 2,105 lbs (955 kg)
Canada: 955 kg
U.S.: 1,808 lbs (820 kg)
Canada: 820 kg

■ Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Type
Charge Quantity
Lubricant Type
Quantity

■ Engine Specifications

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)
13.2 – 15.0 oz (375 – 425 g)
RL85HM (POE)
4.7 – 6.3 cu-in (77 – 103 cm3)

■ Fuel
Fuel:
Type
Fuel Tank Capacity

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number
of 87 or higher
12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

Fog Lights
Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Front Side Marker Lights
Front Turn Signal Lights

■ Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

U.S.: 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)
Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

Side Turn Signal Lights
(on Door Mirrors) *
Brake Lights
Rear Turn Signal Lights
Tail/Rear Side Marker Lights
Back-Up Lights
Taillights
High-Mount Brake Light
Rear License Plate Light
Interior Lights
Map Lights
Ceiling Light
Vanity Mirror Lights
Trunk Light
*1: Except Tour models
*2: Tour models

* Not available on all models

55W (H11)*1
LED*2
60W (HB3)*1
LED*2
35W (H8)
LED
3W
21W (Amber)*1
LED*2
LED
21W
21W (Amber)
LED
16W
LED
21W
LED
8W
8W
2W
5W

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

579 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuSpecificationsu

■ Brake/Clutch * Fluid
Specified

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

■ Continuously Variable Transmission
Fluid *
Specified
Capacity

Recommended

Capacity

Honda HCF-2 Transmission Fluid
Change
3.9 US qt (3.7 L)

■ Manual Transmission Fluid *
Specified
Capacity

■ Engine Oil

Honda Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)
Change
2.0 US qt (1.9 L)

■ Tire
·Genuine Honda Motor Oil 0W-20
·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil
Change
3.4 US qt (3.2 L)
Change
including
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
filter

■ Engine Coolant
Specified
Ratio

Capacity

Regular
Compact
Spare
Wheel Size

Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Size
Pressure
psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])
Regular
Compact Spare

215/50R17 91H
32 (220 [2.2])
T125/80D16 97M
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 7J
16 x 4T

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2
50/50 with distilled water
1.34 US gal (5.09 L)*1
(change including the remaining
0.2 US gal (0.75 L) in the reserve tank)
1.32 US gal (5.01 L)*2
(change including the remaining
0.2 US gal (0.75 L) in the reserve tank)

*1: Continuously variable transmission models
*2: Manual transmission models

Information

* Not available on all models

579

Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number,
and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle.
The locations of your vehicle’s VIN, engine number, and transmission number are
shown as follows.
Vehicle Identification Number
1.5 L engine models

Engine Number
Continuously Variable
Transmission Number *
Manual Transmission
Number *

Information

Certification Label/
Vehicle Identification
Number
2.0 L engine models

Engine Number
Continuously Variable
Transmission Number *
Manual Transmission
Number *

580

* Not available on all models

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and
Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is
located under the cover.

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

581 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Devices that Emit Radio Waves
The following products and systems on your vehicle emit radio waves when in
operation.
Audio System
Bluetooth® Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM*
Immobilizer System
Keyless Access System *
Remote Transmitter
Wireless charger *
Each of the above complies with the appropriate requirements or the required
standards of FCC (Federal Communications Commission) and Industry Canada
Standard, described below:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
* Not available on all models

Information

As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

581

Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
Information

If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada’s Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For
more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.

582

Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness codes as part of the onboard self diagnostic system.
Some States use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle’s emissions
components are working properly.
The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has
gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to ON (w *1, without starting the
engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are
not set.

1Testing of Readiness Codes
The readiness codes are erased when the battery is
disconnected, and set again only after several days of
driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness
codes are not set, you may be requested to return at
a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes
are still not set, see a dealer.

If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready,
prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

Information

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full.
2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more.
3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C).
4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds.
5. Keep the vehicle in (P (continuously variable transmission) or (N (manual
transmission). Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there for about
3 minutes.
6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds.

*1: Models with the smart entry system have an ENGINE START/STOP button instead of an
ignition switch.
Continued

583

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

584 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes

7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in
(D (continuously variable transmission) or 5th (manual). Do not use cruise
control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds,
then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions
allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal
or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.

Information

584

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

585 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

Warranty Coverages
■ U.S. Owners
Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty – covers your new vehicle, except for the
emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance
Warranty – these two warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems.
Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for
exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty – a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered
by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty – all exterior body panels are covered against
rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Information

Accessory Limited Warranty – Honda accessories are covered under this
warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other
factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty – covers all Honda replacement parts
against defects in materials and workmanship.

Continued

585

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

586 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty – provides prorated coverage for a
replacement battery purchased from a dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty – provides coverage for as
long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda
warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on
warranty coverages. Your vehicle’s original tires are covered by their manufacturer.
Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

■ Canadian Owners
Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

■ EPA Contact Information
An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report
violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Information

586

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Office of Transportation and Air Quality
Compliance Division, Light-Duty Vehicle Group
Attn: Warranty Complaints
2000 Traverwood Drive
Ann Arbor, MI 48105
Email: complianceinfo@epa.gov

Authorized Manuals
■ Service Express
For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to
Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options.
■ For U.S. Owners
Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by
phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com.
■ For Canadian Owners
Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.

Information

587

Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal
with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced
with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda
Customer Services.

U.S. Owners
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Honda Automobile Customer Services
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

Information

588

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

Canadian Owners
Honda Canada Inc.
Customer Relations
180 Honda Boulevard
Markham, ON
L6C 0H9
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: 1-877-939-0909
E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following
information:
• Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
Engine Number, and Transmission
Number P. 580
• Date of purchase
• Odometer reading of your vehicle
• Your name, address, and telephone number
• A detailed description of the problem
• Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

Index
Index
A

Audio System............................ 204, 211, 229
Adjusting the Sound........................ 216, 251
Audio/Information Screen................ 212, 230
Changing the Home Screen Icon
Layout ................................................... 234
Changing the Screen Interface ................ 248
Closing Apps........................................... 250
Customizing the Meter............................ 235
Display Setup .................................. 217, 252
Error Messages........................................ 299
General Information ................................ 302
Home Screen........................................... 241
iPod ................................................ 220, 270
Limitations for Manual Operation ............ 253
Menu Customize..................................... 249
MP3/WMA/AAC.............................. 223, 279
Reactivating ............................................ 206
Recommended Devices............................ 303
Remote Controls ..................................... 207
Security Code.......................................... 206
Selecting an Audio Source....................... 253
Status Area ............................................. 247
Theft Protection ...................................... 206
USB Flash Drives ...................................... 303
USB Port(s) .............................................. 205
Wallpaper Setup.............................. 214, 239
Audio/Information Screen ............... 212, 230
Authorized Manuals ................................ 587

Index

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).................. 463
Accessories and Modifications ................ 541
Accessory Power Socket........................... 187
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow (LSF) ........................... 89, 422
Adding the Coolant ................................. 506
Additives
Coolant .................................................. 505
Engine Oil ............................................... 498
Washer ................................................... 509
Additives, Engine Oil ............................... 498
Adjusting
Armrest .................................................. 180
Clock ...................................................... 128
Front Head Restraints.............................. 176
Front Seats.............................................. 173
Mirrors.................................................... 171
Rear Seats............................................... 179
Steering Wheel ....................................... 170
Temperature ................................... 112, 116
Adjusting the Clock ................................. 128
Adjusting the Sound........................ 216, 251
Agile Handling Assist............................... 449
Air Conditioning System (Climate Control
System).................................................... 196
Changing the Mode................................ 196
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 199

Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 535
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 198
Sensor ..................................................... 202
Synchronized Mode ................................. 201
Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 196
Air Conditioning System (Heating
System) .................................................... 193
Sensor ..................................................... 195
Using Automatic Heating......................... 193
Air Pressure ............................... 523, 577, 579
Airbags ........................................................ 46
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 52
After a Collision......................................... 49
Airbag Care ............................................... 59
Event Data Recorder .................................... 0
Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 49
Indicator .............................................. 57, 81
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator ......... 58
Sensors...................................................... 46
Side Airbags .............................................. 53
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 55
AM/FM Radio .................................... 218, 258
Android Auto............................................ 295
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 463
Indicator .................................................... 81
Apple CarPlay ........................................... 292
Armrest ..................................................... 180
Audio Remote Controls............................ 207

589

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 143
Customize ............................... 124, 144, 337
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 460
Indicator ............................................ 78, 460
Automatic Brake Hold System
Indicator ............................................ 78, 460
Automatic Lighting .................................. 163
Average Fuel Economy..................... 111, 115
Average Speed.......................................... 115

Index

590

Battery....................................................... 531
Charging System Indicator ................. 79, 561
Jump Starting .......................................... 555
Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ........ 531
Maintenance (Replacing).......................... 533
Belts (Seat) .................................................. 38
Beverage Holders...................................... 185
Bluetooth® Audio ............................. 226, 282
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ............. 339, 362
Booster Seats (For Children)....................... 71
Brake System............................................. 457
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 463
Automatic Brake Hold.............................. 460
Brake Assist System ................................. 464
Fluid ........................................................ 508
Foot Brake ............................................... 459
Indicator (Red) ........................... 76, 563, 564
Parking Brake .......................................... 457
Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .... 168

Bulb Replacement .................................... 510
Brake Light, Tail/Rear Side Marker Light, Rear
Turn Signal Lights and Back-Up Lights ... 517
Fog Lights ............................................... 512
Front Side Marker Lights.......................... 515
Front Turn Signal Lights........................... 514
Headlights............................................... 510
High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 518
Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 516
Rear License Plate Light ........................... 518
Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 516
Taillights.................................................. 518
Bulb Specifications ........................... 576, 578

C
Carbon Monoxide Gas ............................... 72
Carrying Cargo ................................. 397, 399
Certification Label.................................... 580
Changing Bulbs ........................................ 510
Charging System Indicator................. 79, 561
Child Safety................................................. 60
Childproof Door Locks............................. 142
Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 149
Child Seat.................................................... 60
Booster Seats ............................................ 71
Child Seat for Infants................................. 62
Child Seat for Small Children..................... 63
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt ......................................................... 67

Larger Children ......................................... 70
Rear-facing Child Seat............................... 62
Selecting a Child Seat ............................... 64
Using a Tether .......................................... 68
Childproof Door Locks............................. 142
Cleaning the Exterior............................... 538
Cleaning the Interior ............................... 536
Climate Control System ........................... 196
Changing the Mode................................ 196
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 199
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 535
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 198
Sensors ................................................... 202
Synchronized Mode ................................ 201
Using Automatic Climate Control............ 196
CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking
SystemTM) ................................................ 465
Coat Hooks ............................................... 190
Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ................................................. 465
Compact Spare Tire.................. 545, 577, 579
Console Compartment............................. 184
Continuously Variable Transmission
Creeping................................................. 410
Fluid ....................................................... 507
Kickdown ............................................... 410
Operating the Shift Lever .................. 24, 412
Shift Lever Does Not Move ...................... 558
Shifting................................................... 411

Controls .................................................... 127
Coolant (Engine) ...................................... 505
Adding the Coolant ................................ 506
Overheating............................................ 559
Creeping (Continuously Variable
Transmission).......................................... 410
Cruise Control .......................................... 417
Indicator ................................................... 86
Cup Holders.............................................. 185
Customer Service Information ................ 588
Customized Features ....................... 118, 308

E
Eco Assist® System ........................................ 9
ECON Button............................................. 416
Elapsed Time ............................................. 115
Electric Power Steering (EPS) System ........ 82
Indicator ............................................ 82, 565
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............. 447

Emergency ................................................ 571
Emergency Engine Stop ........................... 554
Emergency Trunk Opener................ 149, 573
Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes)....... 583
Engine
Coolant................................................... 505
Jump Starting.......................................... 555
Oil........................................................... 498
Starting ........................................... 402, 404
Switch Buzzer.......................................... 157
Engine Coolant......................................... 505
Adding the Coolant................................. 506
Overheating ............................................ 559
Temperature Gauge ................................ 109
Engine Oil ................................................. 498
Adding.................................................... 501
Checking................................................. 499
Displaying Maintenance Minder
Information ................................... 485, 490
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 78, 561
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 498
ENGINE START/STOP Button .................... 158
EPS (Electric Power Steering) System ...... 565
Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon
Monoxide)................................................. 72
Exterior Care (Cleaning)........................... 538
Exterior Mirrors ........................................ 172

Index

Daytime Running Lights .......................... 165
Dead Battery ............................................ 555
Defaulting All the Settings...................... 338
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows......................................... 194, 199
Devices that Emit Radio Waves............... 581
Dimming
Headlights .............................................. 162
Rearview Mirror ...................................... 171
Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................ 499
Directional Signals (Turn Signal)............. 162
Display Button.......................................... 230
Display Setup.................................... 217, 252
Display/Information Button .................... 113
Door Mirrors............................................. 172

Doors ......................................................... 130
Auto Door Locking .................................. 143
Auto Door Unlocking............................... 143
Door and Trunk Open Indicator ........... 37, 82
Door Open Message ............................ 37, 94
Keys ........................................................ 130
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Inside............................................... 140
Locking/Unlocking the Doors from
the Outside............................................ 133
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 525
Driver Information Interface ................... 113
Driving....................................................... 395
Braking.................................................... 457
Continuously Variable Transmission ......... 410
Cruise Control ......................................... 417
Shifting Gear ........................................... 413
Shifting Position ...................................... 411
Starting the Engine .......................... 402, 404
Dust and Pollen Filter ............................... 535

591

Index

592

Features..................................................... 203
Filters
Dust and Pollen ....................................... 535
Oil ........................................................... 502
Flat Tire ..................................................... 545
Floor Mats ................................................. 537
Fluids
Brake/Clutch............................................ 508
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) ..................................................... 507
Engine Coolant........................................ 505
Manual Transmission ............................... 507
Windshield Washer.................................. 509
FM/AM Radio .................................... 218, 258
Fog Light Indicator ..................................... 84
Folding Down the Rear Seats................... 179
Foot Brake................................................. 459
Front Airbags (SRS) ..................................... 49
Front Head Restraints............................... 176
Front Seat Heaters .................................... 191
Front Seats ................................................ 173
Adjusting................................................. 173
Front Sensor Camera ................................ 420
Fuel ...................................................... 25, 476
Economy ................................................. 479
Gauge ..................................................... 109
Instant Fuel Economy....................... 111, 116
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 80

Range ............................................. 111, 115
Recommendation .................................... 476
Refueling......................................... 476, 574
Fuel Economy ........................................... 479
Fuel Fill Door ...................................... 25, 477
Fuses.......................................................... 567
Inspecting and Changing......................... 570
Locations......................................... 567, 568

G
Gasoline (Fuel)
Economy ................................................. 479
Gauge..................................................... 109
Information ............................................. 476
Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 111, 116
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 80
Refueling......................................... 476, 574
Gauges ...................................................... 108
Gear Shift Lever Positions
Continuously Variable Transmission......... 411
Manual Transmission............................... 414
Glass (care)........................................ 536, 539
Glove Box.................................................. 183

H
Halogen Bulbs .................................. 510, 513
Handling the Unexpected........................ 543

HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ...................... 339, 362
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and
Call History ................................... 351, 375
Displaying Messages ............................... 389
HFL Buttons .................................... 339, 362
HFL Menus...................................... 341, 365
HFL Status Display ........................... 340, 364
In Case of Emergency ............................. 393
Limitations for Manual Operation.... 340, 364
Making a Call ................................. 356, 383
Options During a Call...................... 361, 386
Phone Setup ................................... 345, 370
Phonebook Phonetic Modification........... 379
Receiving a Call............................... 360, 386
Receiving a Text/E-mail Message ............. 387
Ring Tone ....................................... 349, 374
Selecting a Mail Account......................... 388
Speed Dial ...................................... 352, 376
To Set Up Text/E-mail Message
Options................................................. 373
Hazard Warning Button .............................. 4
HD RadioTM ............................................... 259
Headlights ................................................ 162
Aiming.................................................... 510
Automatic Operation .............................. 163
Dimming......................................... 162, 165
Operating ............................................... 162
Heaters (Front Seat) ................................. 191
Heaters (Rear Seat) .................................. 192

Heating and Cooling System
Dust and Pollen Filter .............................. 535
Heating System ........................................ 193
Changing the Mode................................ 193
Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows .............................................. 194
Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode................... 194
Sensors ................................................... 195
Using Automatic Heating ........................ 193
HFL (HandsFreeLink®) ...................... 339, 362
High Beam Indicator.................................. 84
Hill Start Assist System..................... 403, 408
HondaLink® .............................................. 284

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®)
System ............................................ 81, 447
VSA® OFF .......................................... 82, 448
Washer Level............................................. 86
Information .............................................. 575
Information Display ................................. 110
Instant Fuel Economy....................... 111, 116
Instrument Panel ........................................ 75
Brightness Control................................... 168
Interior Lights ........................................... 181
Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 171
iPod ................................................... 220, 270

J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 548
Jump Starting ........................................... 555

K
Key Number Tag....................................... 131
Keys ........................................................... 130
Keys ........................................................ 130
Number Tag ............................................ 131
Rear Door Won’t Open............................ 142
Remote Transmitter................................. 137
Types and Functions ................................ 130
Won’t Turn ............................................... 29
Kickdown (Continuously Variable
Transmission) .......................................... 410

Index

Identification Numbers............................ 580
Vehicle Identification............................... 580
Ignition Switch ......................................... 157
Illumination Control ................................ 168
Knob ...................................................... 168
Immobilizer System.................................. 150
Immobilizer System Indicator..................... 85
Indicators.................................................... 76
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed
Follow (LSF)..................................... 89, 422
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 81
Automatic Brake Hold....................... 78, 460
Automatic Brake Hold System ........... 78, 460
Brake Depressing ...................................... 87
Charging System............................... 79, 561

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ........................................... 91, 92
CRUISE CONTROL.............................. 86, 418
CRUISE MAIN .................................... 86, 417
Door and Trunk Open.......................... 37, 82
ECON Mode ...................................... 86, 416
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
System............................................. 82, 565
Fog Light ................................................... 84
High Beam ................................................ 84
Immobilizer System.................................... 85
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .... 90, 442
Lights On................................................... 84
Low Fuel.................................................... 80
Low Oil Pressure ................................ 78, 561
Low Tire Pressure/TPMS ..... 83, 452, 455, 566
Maintenance Minder ......................... 86, 485
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............... 79, 562
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Amber) ........................................... 77, 564
Parking Brake and Brake System
(Red)........................................ 76, 563, 564
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).............. 88
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 40, 80
Security System Alarm ............................... 85
Shift Lever Position .................................... 79
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 57, 81
System Message ........................................ 84
Transmission.............................................. 80
Turn Signal ................................................ 84

593

Index

594

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ......... 440
LaneWatchTM ............................................. 450
Language (HFL)................................. 340, 364
LATCH (Child Seats) .................................... 65
Lights ................................................. 162, 510
Automatic ............................................... 163
Bulb Replacement.................................... 510
Daytime Running Lights ........................... 165
Fog Lights................................................ 165
High Beam Indicator .................................. 84
Interior .................................................... 181
Light Switches ......................................... 162
Lights On Indicator .................................... 84
Turn Signals............................................. 162
Load Limits ................................................ 399
Locking/Unlocking .................................... 130
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .................. 143
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 142
From Inside.............................................. 140
From Outside........................................... 133
Keys ........................................................ 130
Using a Key ............................................. 139
Low Battery Charge.................................. 561
Low Fuel Indicator ...................................... 80
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 78, 561
Low Smart Entry Remote Signal
Strength................................................... 132
Lower Anchors ............................................ 65
Lubricant Specifications Chart ......... 576, 578
Luggage (Maximum Load Limit).............. 399

Maintenance............................................. 481
Adding the Coolant................................. 506
Battery .................................................... 531
Brake/Clutch Fluid ................................... 508
Cleaning ................................................. 536
Climate Control System........................... 535
Coolant................................................... 505
Heating System ....................................... 535
Maintenance MinderTM ............................ 485
Oil........................................................... 499
Precautions ............................................. 482
Remote Transmitter................................. 533
Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 510
Safety...................................................... 483
Service Items ................................... 487, 492
Tires ........................................................ 522
Transmission Fluid ................................... 507
Under the Hood ...................................... 495
Malfunction Indicator Lamp.............. 79, 562
Manual Transmission ............................... 413
Map Lights ................................................ 182
Maximum Load Limit ............................... 399
Meters, Gauges......................................... 108
Mirrors ...................................................... 171
Adjusting ................................................ 171
Door ....................................................... 172
Exterior ................................................... 172
Interior Rearview ..................................... 171
Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 541
Moonroof ................................................. 156

MP3................................................... 223, 279
Multi-View Rear Camera ......................... 474

N
Numbers (Identification) ......................... 580

O
Odometer ......................................... 110, 114
Oil (Engine) .............................................. 498
Adding ................................................... 501
Checking ................................................ 499
Displaying Maintenance Minder
Information................................... 485, 490
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ................. 78, 561
Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 498
Viscosity.................................................. 498
Open Source Licenses .............................. 306
Opening
Trunk ...................................................... 573
Opening/Closing
Hood ...................................................... 497
Moonroof ............................................... 156
Power Windows...................................... 153
Trunk ...................................................... 147
Outside Temperature Display ......... 112, 116
Overheating ............................................. 559

P
Pandora® .................................................. 277
Panic Mode............................................... 152
Parking ..................................................... 473
Parking Brake........................................... 457
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Amber)............................................. 77, 564
Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator
(Red).......................................... 76, 563, 564
Passenger Front Airbag Off Indicator....... 58
Passing Indicators..................................... 162
Playing Bluetooth® Audio ............... 226, 282
Power Windows ....................................... 153
Precautions While Driving....................... 409
Rain ........................................................ 409
Pregnant Women....................................... 44
Puncture (Tire) ......................................... 545

Refueling................................................... 476
Fuel Gauge .............................................. 109
Gasoline .......................... 476, 574, 576, 578
Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 80
Regulations ............................... 455, 525, 581
Remote Transmitter ................................. 137
Replacement
Battery .................................................... 533
Bulbs ....................................................... 510
Fuses ............................................... 567, 568
Tires ........................................................ 528
Wiper Blade Rubber................................. 519
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 582
Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 110, 114
Road Departure Mitigation (RDM).......... 436
On and Off .............................................. 437

S
R

Index

Radio (FM/AM) ................................. 218, 258
Radio (SiriusXM®)..................................... 262
Radio Data System (RDS) ................. 219, 260
Range................................................ 111, 115
RDS (Radio Data System) ................. 219, 260
Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ...... 583
Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button..................................................... 169
Rear Seat Heaters..................................... 192
Rear Seats (Folding Down) ...................... 179
Rearview Mirror ....................................... 171

Safe Driving ................................................ 33
Safety Check ............................................... 37
Safety Labels ............................................... 73
Safety Message ............................................. 1
Seat Belts..................................................... 38
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor .................. 43
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners.................. 41
Checking ................................................... 45
Fastening................................................... 42
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat
Belt.......................................................... 67
Pregnant Women ...................................... 44

Reminder .................................................. 40
Warning Indicator ............................... 40, 80
Seat Heaters.............................................. 192
Seats .......................................................... 173
Adjusting ................................................ 173
Front Seat Heaters................................... 191
Front Seats .............................................. 173
Rear Seat Heaters .................................... 192
Rear Seats ............................................... 179
Security System......................................... 150
Security System Alarm Indicator................. 85
Select Lever................................. 24, 411, 413
Operation.................................. 24, 412, 413
Releasing................................................. 558
Won’t Move............................................ 558
Select/Reset Knob............................. 110, 114
Selecting a Child Seat................................. 64
Selector Knob (Audio).............................. 211
Setting the Clock ...................................... 128
Shift Lever................................... 24, 411, 413
Shift Lever Position Indicator .................... 79
Shift Position Indicator ............................ 412
Shifting (Transmission)..................... 411, 413
Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 43
Side Airbags................................................ 53
Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 55
Siri Eyes Free ............................................. 291
SiriusXM® Radio........................................ 262
Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System ..................................................... 133
Snow Tires................................................. 530

595

Song By VoiceTM (SBV) .............................. 273
Spare Tire .................................. 545, 577, 579
Spark Plugs........................................ 576, 578
Specifications ............................................ 576
Specified Fuel............................ 476, 576, 578
Speedometer............................................. 108
SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................. 49
Starting the Engine .......................... 402, 404
Does Not Start ......................................... 552
Engine Switch Buzzer............................... 157
Jump Starting .......................................... 555
Steering Wheel
Adjusting................................................. 170
Stopping.................................................... 473
Summer Tires ............................................ 530
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........ 49
Switches (Around the Steering
Wheel) ............................................. 4, 5, 157
System Message Indicator .......................... 84

Index

596

Tachometer ............................................... 108
Temperature
Outside Temperature Display ........... 112, 116
Temperature Sensor ......................... 112, 116
Time (Setting) ........................................... 128
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)...................................................... 452
Indicator ............................................ 83, 566

Tires........................................................... 522
Air Pressure ............................. 523, 577, 579
Checking and Maintaining ...................... 522
Inspection ............................................... 522
Labeling .................................................. 523
Puncture (Flat Tire) .................................. 545
Regulations ............................................. 525
Rotation .................................................. 529
Spare Tire................................ 545, 577, 579
Summer .................................................. 530
Tire Chains .............................................. 530
Wear Indicators ....................................... 527
Winter..................................................... 530
Tools.......................................................... 544
Towing Your Vehicle
Emergency .............................................. 571
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System) .................................................... 452
Indicator............................................ 83, 566
Transmission ..................................... 411, 413
Continuously Variable Transmission......... 411
Fluid........................................................ 507
Manual ................................................... 413
Shift Lever Position Indicator.............. 79, 412
Trip Meter......................................... 110, 114
Troubleshooting....................................... 543
Blown Fuse...................................... 567, 568
Brake Pedal Vibrates.................................. 29
Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door.......... 30
Emergency Towing.................................. 571

Engine Won’t Start ................................. 552
Noise When Braking ................................. 30
Overheating............................................ 559
Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 545
Rear Door Won’t Open ..................... 30, 142
Select Lever Won’t Move ........................ 558
Warning Indicators.................................... 76
Trunk ........................................................ 147
Lid .......................................................... 147
Light Bulb ....................................... 576, 578
Release Lever .......................................... 573
Unable to Open ...................................... 573
Turbo Engine Vehicle .............................. 480
Turn Signals.............................................. 162
Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 84

U
Unlocking the Doors................................ 133
Unlocking the Front Doors from
the Inside ................................................ 140
USB Adapter Cable .................................. 204
USB Flash Drives ....................... 223, 279, 303
USB Port(s)................................................ 205
Using the Smart Entry with Push Button Start
System..................................................... 133

V
Vanity Mirrors .............................................. 7
Vehicle Identification Number................ 580
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®) ................. 447
Off Button .............................................. 448
Off Indicator ............................................. 82
System Indicator ....................................... 81
Viscosity (Oil)............................ 498, 577, 579
Voice Control Operation ......................... 254
Audio Commands................................... 256
Climate Control Commands.................... 257
General Commands ................................ 257
Music Search Commands........................ 257
On Screen Commands ............................ 257
Phone Commands .................................. 256
Useful Commands .................................. 256
Voice Portal Screen ................................. 255
Voice Recognition ................................... 254
VSA® (Vehicle Stability Assist) ................. 447

Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle) ........... 548
Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 289
Window Washers...................................... 166
Adding/Refilling Fluid............................... 509
Switch ..................................................... 166
Windows (Opening and Closing)............. 153
Windshield ................................................ 166
Cleaning.......................................... 536, 539
Defrosting/Defogging ...................... 194, 199
Washer Fluid ........................................... 509
Wiper Blades ........................................... 519
Wipers and Washers ................................ 166
Winter Tires .............................................. 530
Snow Tires............................................... 530
Tire Chains .............................................. 530
Wipers and Washers ................................. 166
Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 519
Wireless Charger....................................... 188
WMA ................................................. 223, 279
Worn Tires................................................. 522

Index

Wallpaper......................................... 214, 239
Warning and Information
Messages............................................. 93, 94
Warning Indicator On/Blinking............... 561
Warning Labels .......................................... 73
Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately) .............................................. 585
Watts ................................................ 576, 578
Wear Indicators (Tire) .............................. 527

597

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

598 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

599 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

17 CIVIC 4D HCM (KA KC KL)-31TBA6100.book

600 ページ

２０１６年８月３１日

水曜日

午後６時５分

2017 Civic

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation